Mercurial > emacs
annotate man/programs.texi @ 38149:a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
author | Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Fri, 22 Jun 2001 11:32:07 +0000 |
parents | 071d97105015 |
children | ec15967a5cf7 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
25829 | 1 @c This is part of the Emacs manual. |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
2 @c Copyright (C) 1985,86,87,93,94,95,97,99,2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
25829 | 3 @c See file emacs.texi for copying conditions. |
4 @node Programs, Building, Text, Top | |
5 @chapter Editing Programs | |
6 @cindex Lisp editing | |
7 @cindex C editing | |
8 @cindex program editing | |
9 | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
10 Emacs provides many features to facilitate editing programs. These |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
11 features can: |
25829 | 12 |
13 @itemize @bullet | |
14 @item | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
15 Move over or kill balanced expressions (@pxref{Lists}). |
25829 | 16 @item |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
17 Move over or mark top-level expressions, such as @dfn{defuns} in |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
18 Lisp, or function definitions in C (@pxref{Defuns}). |
25829 | 19 @item |
20 Show how parentheses balance (@pxref{Matching}). | |
21 @item | |
22 Insert, kill or align comments (@pxref{Comments}). | |
23 @item | |
24 Follow the usual indentation conventions of the language | |
25 (@pxref{Program Indent}). | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
26 @item |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
27 Highlight program syntax (@pxref{Font Lock}). |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
28 @item |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
29 Compile and debug programs (@pxref{Building}). |
25829 | 30 @end itemize |
31 | |
32 @menu | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
33 * Misc for Programs:: Other Emacs features useful for editing programs. |
25829 | 34 * Program Modes:: Major modes for editing programs. |
35 * Lists:: Expressions with balanced parentheses. | |
36 * List Commands:: The commands for working with list and sexps. | |
37 * Defuns:: Each program is made up of separate functions. | |
38 There are editing commands to operate on them. | |
39 * Program Indent:: Adjusting indentation to show the nesting. | |
40 * Matching:: Insertion of a close-delimiter flashes matching open. | |
41 * Comments:: Inserting, killing, and aligning comments. | |
42 * Balanced Editing:: Inserting two matching parentheses at once, etc. | |
43 * Symbol Completion:: Completion on symbol names of your program or language. | |
44 * Which Function:: Which Function mode shows which function you are in. | |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
45 * Hideshow:: Displaying blocks selectively. |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
46 * Glasses:: Making identifiersLikeThis more readable. |
25829 | 47 * Documentation:: Getting documentation of functions you plan to call. |
48 * Change Log:: Maintaining a change history for your program. | |
30793 | 49 * Authors:: Maintaining an @file{AUTHORS} file. |
25829 | 50 * Tags:: Go direct to any function in your program in one |
51 command. Tags remembers which file it is in. | |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
52 * Imenu:: Making buffer indexes as menus. |
25829 | 53 * Emerge:: A convenient way of merging two versions of a program. |
26264 | 54 * C Modes:: Special commands of C, C++, Objective-C, |
25829 | 55 Java, and Pike modes. |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
56 * Fortran:: Fortran mode and its special features. |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
57 * Asm Mode:: Asm mode and its special features. |
25829 | 58 @end menu |
59 | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
60 @node Misc for Programs |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
61 @section Other Features Useful for Editing Programs |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
62 |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
63 A number of Emacs commands that aren't designed specifically for |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
64 editing programs are useful for it nonetheless. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
65 |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
66 The Emacs commands that operate on words, sentences and paragraphs |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
67 are useful for editing code. Most symbols names contain words |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
68 (@pxref{Words}); sentences can be found in strings and comments |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
69 (@pxref{Sentences}). Paragraphs in the strict sense may be found in |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
70 program code (in long comments), but the paragraph commands are useful |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
71 in other places too, because programming language major modes define |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
72 paragraphs to begin and end at blank lines (@pxref{Paragraphs}). |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
73 Judicious use of blank lines to make the program clearer will also |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
74 provide useful chunks of text for the paragraph commands to work on. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
75 |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
76 The selective display feature is useful for looking at the overall |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
77 structure of a function (@pxref{Selective Display}). This feature |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
78 hides the lines that are indented more than a specified amount. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
79 Programming modes often support Outline minor mode (@pxref{Outline |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
80 Mode}). The Foldout package provides folding-editor features |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
81 (@pxref{Foldout}). |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
82 |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
83 The ``automatic typing'' features may be useful for writing programs. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
84 @xref{Top,,Autotyping, autotype, Autotyping}. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
85 |
25829 | 86 @node Program Modes |
87 @section Major Modes for Programming Languages | |
88 @cindex modes for programming languages | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
89 |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
90 Emacs has specialized major modes for various programming languages. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
91 @xref{Major Modes}. A programming language major mode typically |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
92 specifies the syntax of expressions, the customary rules for |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
93 indentation, how to do syntax highlighting for the language, and how |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
94 to find the beginning of a function definition. They often provide |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
95 facilities for compiling and debugging programs as well. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
96 |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
97 Ideally, Emacs should provide a major mode for each programming |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
98 language that you might want to edit; if it doesn't have a mode for |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
99 your favorite language, you can contribute one. But often the mode |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
100 for one language can serve for other syntactically similar languages. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
101 The major mode for language @var{l} is called @code{@var{l}-mode}, |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
102 and you can enable it by typing @kbd{M-x @var{l}-mode @key{RET}}. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
103 @xref{Choosing Modes}. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
104 |
25829 | 105 @cindex Perl mode |
106 @cindex Icon mode | |
107 @cindex Awk mode | |
108 @cindex Makefile mode | |
109 @cindex Tcl mode | |
110 @cindex CPerl mode | |
26106 | 111 @cindex DSSSL mode |
112 @cindex Octave mode | |
113 @cindex Metafont mode | |
114 @cindex Modula2 mode | |
115 @cindex Prolog mode | |
116 @cindex Simula mode | |
117 @cindex VHDL mode | |
118 @cindex M4 mode | |
119 @cindex Shell-script mode | |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
120 @cindex Delphi mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
121 @cindex PostScript mode |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
122 The existing programming language major modes include Lisp, Scheme (a |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
123 variant of Lisp) and the Scheme-based DSSSL expression language, Ada, |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
124 Awk, C, C++, Delphi (Object Pascal), Fortran (free format and fixed |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
125 format), Icon, IDL (CORBA), IDLWAVE, Java, Metafont (@TeX{}'s |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
126 companion for font creation), Modula2, Objective-C, Octave, Pascal, |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
127 Perl, Pike, PostScript, Prolog, Simula, and Tcl, and VHDL. There is |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
128 also a major mode for makefiles, called Makefile mode. An alternative |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
129 mode for Perl is called CPerl mode. Modes are available for the |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
130 scripting languages of the common Unix shells, VMS DCL, and |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
131 MS-DOS/MS-Windows @samp{BAT} files. There are also major modes for |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
132 editing various sorts of configuration files. |
25829 | 133 |
134 @kindex DEL @r{(programming modes)} | |
37978
c41356c953a0
Correct names of some C mode indentation commands.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
37868
diff
changeset
|
135 @findex c-electric-backspace |
c41356c953a0
Correct names of some C mode indentation commands.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
37868
diff
changeset
|
136 In most programming languages, indentation is likely to vary from |
c41356c953a0
Correct names of some C mode indentation commands.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
37868
diff
changeset
|
137 line to line. So the major modes for those languages rebind @key{DEL} |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
138 to treat a tab as if it were the equivalent number of spaces. This |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
139 makes it possible to reduce indentation one column at a time without |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
140 worrying whether it is made up of spaces or tabs. Use @kbd{C-b C-d} |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
141 to delete a tab character before point, in these modes. |
25829 | 142 |
143 Programming language modes define paragraphs to be separated only by | |
144 blank lines, so that the paragraph commands remain useful. Auto Fill mode, | |
145 if enabled in a programming language major mode, indents the new lines | |
146 which it creates. | |
147 | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
148 Separate manuals are available for the modes for Ada (@pxref{Top, , Ada |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
149 Mode, ada-mode, Ada Mode}), C/C++/Objective C/Java/Corba IDL |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
150 (@pxref{Top, , CC Mode, ccmode, CC Mode}) and the IDLWAVE modes |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
151 (@pxref{Top, , IDLWAVE, idlwave, IDLWAVE User Manual}). |
38122
4aeb215906f3
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken <Peter.Milliken@GTECH.COM>.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38090
diff
changeset
|
152 |
25829 | 153 @cindex mode hook |
154 @vindex c-mode-hook | |
155 @vindex lisp-mode-hook | |
156 @vindex emacs-lisp-mode-hook | |
157 @vindex lisp-interaction-mode-hook | |
158 @vindex scheme-mode-hook | |
159 Turning on a major mode runs a normal hook called the @dfn{mode hook}, | |
160 which is the value of a Lisp variable. Each major mode has a mode hook, | |
161 and the hook's name is always made from the mode command's name by | |
162 adding @samp{-hook}. For example, turning on C mode runs the hook | |
163 @code{c-mode-hook}, while turning on Lisp mode runs the hook | |
164 @code{lisp-mode-hook}. @xref{Hooks}. | |
165 | |
166 @node Lists | |
167 @section Lists and Sexps | |
168 | |
169 @cindex Control-Meta | |
170 By convention, Emacs keys for dealing with balanced expressions are | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
171 Control-Meta characters. They act like the corresponding Control and |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
172 Meta equivalents, except that they operate on balanced expressions |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
173 instead of on characters or words. For instance, the command |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
174 @kbd{C-M-b} moves backward over a balanced expression, just as |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
175 @kbd{C-b} moves back over a character and @kbd{M-b} moves back over a |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
176 word. These commands are intended for expressions in programming |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
177 languages, but can be useful for editing any text that has |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
178 parentheses. |
25829 | 179 |
180 @cindex list | |
181 @cindex sexp | |
182 @cindex expression | |
183 These commands fall into two classes. Some deal only with @dfn{lists} | |
184 (parenthetical groupings). They see nothing except parentheses, brackets, | |
185 braces (whichever ones must balance in the language you are working with), | |
186 and escape characters that might be used to quote those. | |
187 | |
36185 | 188 The other commands deal with expressions or @dfn{sexps}. The word ``sexp'' |
25829 | 189 is derived from @dfn{s-expression}, the ancient term for an expression in |
36185 | 190 Lisp. But in Emacs, the notion of ``sexp'' is not limited to Lisp. It |
25829 | 191 refers to an expression in whatever language your program is written in. |
192 Each programming language has its own major mode, which customizes the | |
193 syntax tables so that expressions in that language count as sexps. | |
194 | |
195 Sexps typically include symbols, numbers, and string constants, as well | |
196 as anything contained in parentheses, brackets or braces. | |
197 | |
198 In languages that use prefix and infix operators, such as C, it is not | |
199 possible for all expressions to be sexps. For example, C mode does not | |
200 recognize @samp{foo + bar} as a sexp, even though it @emph{is} a C expression; | |
201 it recognizes @samp{foo} as one sexp and @samp{bar} as another, with the | |
202 @samp{+} as punctuation between them. This is a fundamental ambiguity: | |
203 both @samp{foo + bar} and @samp{foo} are legitimate choices for the sexp to | |
204 move over if point is at the @samp{f}. Note that @samp{(foo + bar)} is a | |
205 single sexp in C mode. | |
206 | |
207 Some languages have obscure forms of expression syntax that nobody | |
208 has bothered to make Emacs understand properly. | |
209 | |
210 @node List Commands | |
211 @section List And Sexp Commands | |
212 | |
213 @c doublewidecommands | |
214 @table @kbd | |
215 @item C-M-f | |
216 Move forward over a sexp (@code{forward-sexp}). | |
217 @item C-M-b | |
218 Move backward over a sexp (@code{backward-sexp}). | |
219 @item C-M-k | |
220 Kill sexp forward (@code{kill-sexp}). | |
221 @item C-M-@key{DEL} | |
222 Kill sexp backward (@code{backward-kill-sexp}). | |
223 @item C-M-u | |
224 Move up and backward in list structure (@code{backward-up-list}). | |
225 @item C-M-d | |
226 Move down and forward in list structure (@code{down-list}). | |
227 @item C-M-n | |
228 Move forward over a list (@code{forward-list}). | |
229 @item C-M-p | |
230 Move backward over a list (@code{backward-list}). | |
231 @item C-M-t | |
232 Transpose expressions (@code{transpose-sexps}). | |
233 @item C-M-@@ | |
234 Put mark after following expression (@code{mark-sexp}). | |
235 @end table | |
236 | |
34821
1d7bee7283ac
Move the cindex about moving to matching paren into the "List Commands"
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34254
diff
changeset
|
237 @cindex parentheses, moving across |
1d7bee7283ac
Move the cindex about moving to matching paren into the "List Commands"
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34254
diff
changeset
|
238 @cindex matching parenthesis and braces, moving to |
1d7bee7283ac
Move the cindex about moving to matching paren into the "List Commands"
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34254
diff
changeset
|
239 @cindex braces, moving across |
25829 | 240 @kindex C-M-f |
241 @kindex C-M-b | |
242 @findex forward-sexp | |
243 @findex backward-sexp | |
244 To move forward over a sexp, use @kbd{C-M-f} (@code{forward-sexp}). If | |
245 the first significant character after point is an opening delimiter | |
246 (@samp{(} in Lisp; @samp{(}, @samp{[} or @samp{@{} in C), @kbd{C-M-f} | |
247 moves past the matching closing delimiter. If the character begins a | |
248 symbol, string, or number, @kbd{C-M-f} moves over that. | |
249 | |
250 The command @kbd{C-M-b} (@code{backward-sexp}) moves backward over a | |
251 sexp. The detailed rules are like those above for @kbd{C-M-f}, but with | |
252 directions reversed. If there are any prefix characters (single-quote, | |
253 backquote and comma, in Lisp) preceding the sexp, @kbd{C-M-b} moves back | |
254 over them as well. The sexp commands move across comments as if they | |
255 were whitespace in most modes. | |
256 | |
257 @kbd{C-M-f} or @kbd{C-M-b} with an argument repeats that operation the | |
258 specified number of times; with a negative argument, it moves in the | |
259 opposite direction. | |
260 | |
34821
1d7bee7283ac
Move the cindex about moving to matching paren into the "List Commands"
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34254
diff
changeset
|
261 @cindex deleting parenthesized expressions |
25829 | 262 @kindex C-M-k |
263 @findex kill-sexp | |
264 @kindex C-M-DEL | |
265 @findex backward-kill-sexp | |
266 Killing a whole sexp can be done with @kbd{C-M-k} (@code{kill-sexp}) | |
267 or @kbd{C-M-@key{DEL}} (@code{backward-kill-sexp}). @kbd{C-M-k} kills | |
268 the characters that @kbd{C-M-f} would move over, and @kbd{C-M-@key{DEL}} | |
269 kills the characters that @kbd{C-M-b} would move over. | |
270 | |
271 @kindex C-M-n | |
272 @kindex C-M-p | |
273 @findex forward-list | |
274 @findex backward-list | |
275 The @dfn{list commands} move over lists, as the sexp commands do, but skip | |
276 blithely over any number of other kinds of sexps (symbols, strings, etc.). | |
277 They are @kbd{C-M-n} (@code{forward-list}) and @kbd{C-M-p} | |
278 (@code{backward-list}). The main reason they are useful is that they | |
279 usually ignore comments (since the comments usually do not contain any | |
280 lists).@refill | |
281 | |
282 @kindex C-M-u | |
283 @kindex C-M-d | |
284 @findex backward-up-list | |
285 @findex down-list | |
286 @kbd{C-M-n} and @kbd{C-M-p} stay at the same level in parentheses, when | |
287 that's possible. To move @emph{up} one (or @var{n}) levels, use @kbd{C-M-u} | |
288 (@code{backward-up-list}). | |
289 @kbd{C-M-u} moves backward up past one unmatched opening delimiter. A | |
290 positive argument serves as a repeat count; a negative argument reverses | |
291 direction of motion and also requests repetition, so it moves forward and | |
292 up one or more levels.@refill | |
293 | |
294 To move @emph{down} in list structure, use @kbd{C-M-d} | |
295 (@code{down-list}). In Lisp mode, where @samp{(} is the only opening | |
296 delimiter, this is nearly the same as searching for a @samp{(}. An | |
297 argument specifies the number of levels of parentheses to go down. | |
298 | |
34821
1d7bee7283ac
Move the cindex about moving to matching paren into the "List Commands"
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
34254
diff
changeset
|
299 @cindex transposition of parenthesized expressions |
25829 | 300 @kindex C-M-t |
301 @findex transpose-sexps | |
302 A somewhat random-sounding command which is nevertheless handy is | |
303 @kbd{C-M-t} (@code{transpose-sexps}), which drags the previous sexp | |
304 across the next one. An argument serves as a repeat count, and a | |
305 negative argument drags backwards (thus canceling out the effect of | |
306 @kbd{C-M-t} with a positive argument). An argument of zero, rather than | |
307 doing nothing, transposes the sexps ending after point and the mark. | |
308 | |
309 @kindex C-M-@@ | |
310 @findex mark-sexp | |
311 To set the region around the next sexp in the buffer, use @kbd{C-M-@@} | |
312 (@code{mark-sexp}), which sets mark at the same place that @kbd{C-M-f} | |
313 would move to. @kbd{C-M-@@} takes arguments like @kbd{C-M-f}. In | |
314 particular, a negative argument is useful for putting the mark at the | |
315 beginning of the previous sexp. | |
316 | |
317 The list and sexp commands' understanding of syntax is completely | |
318 controlled by the syntax table. Any character can, for example, be | |
319 declared to be an opening delimiter and act like an open parenthesis. | |
320 @xref{Syntax}. | |
321 | |
322 @node Defuns | |
323 @section Defuns | |
324 @cindex defuns | |
325 | |
326 In Emacs, a parenthetical grouping at the top level in the buffer is | |
327 called a @dfn{defun}. The name derives from the fact that most top-level | |
328 lists in a Lisp file are instances of the special form @code{defun}, but | |
329 any top-level parenthetical grouping counts as a defun in Emacs parlance | |
330 regardless of what its contents are, and regardless of the programming | |
331 language in use. For example, in C, the body of a function definition is a | |
332 defun. | |
333 | |
38123
af8117970ca7
More proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38122
diff
changeset
|
334 |
af8117970ca7
More proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38122
diff
changeset
|
335 @cindex move to beginning or end of function |
af8117970ca7
More proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38122
diff
changeset
|
336 @cindex function, move to beginning or end |
af8117970ca7
More proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38122
diff
changeset
|
337 @kindex C-M-a |
af8117970ca7
More proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38122
diff
changeset
|
338 @kindex C-M-e |
af8117970ca7
More proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38122
diff
changeset
|
339 @kindex C-M-h |
af8117970ca7
More proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38122
diff
changeset
|
340 @findex beginning-of-defun |
af8117970ca7
More proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38122
diff
changeset
|
341 @findex end-of-defun |
af8117970ca7
More proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38122
diff
changeset
|
342 @findex mark-defun |
25829 | 343 @c doublewidecommands |
344 @table @kbd | |
345 @item C-M-a | |
346 Move to beginning of current or preceding defun | |
347 (@code{beginning-of-defun}). | |
348 @item C-M-e | |
349 Move to end of current or following defun (@code{end-of-defun}). | |
350 @item C-M-h | |
351 Put region around whole current or following defun (@code{mark-defun}). | |
352 @end table | |
353 | |
36263
11db0318031d
Remove redundant index entries.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36198
diff
changeset
|
354 @kindex C-M-h @r{(C mode)} |
25829 | 355 @findex c-mark-function |
356 If you wish to operate on the current defun, use @kbd{C-M-h} | |
357 (@code{mark-defun}) which puts point at the beginning and mark at the end | |
358 of the current or next defun. For example, this is the easiest way to get | |
359 ready to move the defun to a different place in the text. In C mode, | |
360 @kbd{C-M-h} runs the function @code{c-mark-function}, which is almost the | |
361 same as @code{mark-defun}; the difference is that it backs up over the | |
362 argument declarations, function name and returned data type so that the | |
363 entire C function is inside the region. @xref{Marking Objects}. | |
364 | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
365 @cindex open-parenthesis in leftmost column |
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
366 @cindex ( in leftmost column |
25829 | 367 Emacs assumes that any open-parenthesis found in the leftmost column |
368 is the start of a defun. Therefore, @strong{never put an | |
369 open-parenthesis at the left margin in a Lisp file unless it is the | |
370 start of a top-level list. Never put an open-brace or other opening | |
371 delimiter at the beginning of a line of C code unless it starts the body | |
372 of a function.} The most likely problem case is when you want an | |
373 opening delimiter at the start of a line inside a string. To avoid | |
374 trouble, put an escape character (@samp{\}, in C and Emacs Lisp, | |
375 @samp{/} in some other Lisp dialects) before the opening delimiter. It | |
376 will not affect the contents of the string. | |
377 | |
378 In the remotest past, the original Emacs found defuns by moving upward a | |
379 level of parentheses until there were no more levels to go up. This always | |
380 required scanning all the way back to the beginning of the buffer, even for | |
381 a small function. To speed up the operation, Emacs was changed to assume | |
382 that any @samp{(} (or other character assigned the syntactic class of | |
383 opening-delimiter) at the left margin is the start of a defun. This | |
384 heuristic is nearly always right and avoids the costly scan; however, | |
385 it mandates the convention described above. | |
386 | |
387 @node Program Indent | |
388 @section Indentation for Programs | |
389 @cindex indentation for programs | |
390 | |
391 The best way to keep a program properly indented is to use Emacs to | |
392 reindent it as you change it. Emacs has commands to indent properly | |
393 either a single line, a specified number of lines, or all of the lines | |
394 inside a single parenthetical grouping. | |
395 | |
396 @menu | |
397 * Basic Indent:: Indenting a single line. | |
398 * Multi-line Indent:: Commands to reindent many lines at once. | |
399 * Lisp Indent:: Specifying how each Lisp function should be indented. | |
400 * C Indent:: Extra features for indenting C and related modes. | |
401 * Custom C Indent:: Controlling indentation style for C and related modes. | |
402 @end menu | |
403 | |
404 Emacs also provides a Lisp pretty-printer in the library @code{pp}. | |
405 This program reformats a Lisp object with indentation chosen to look nice. | |
406 | |
407 @node Basic Indent | |
408 @subsection Basic Program Indentation Commands | |
409 | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
410 Programming language major modes define the @key{TAB} key to indent |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
411 according to the usual conventions of the language you are editing. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
412 @kbd{C-j} is normally defined to do @key{RET} followed by @key{TAB}; |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
413 thus, it too indents in a mode-specific fashion. |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
414 |
25829 | 415 @c WideCommands |
416 @table @kbd | |
417 @item @key{TAB} | |
418 Adjust indentation of current line. | |
419 @item C-j | |
420 Equivalent to @key{RET} followed by @key{TAB} (@code{newline-and-indent}). | |
421 @end table | |
422 | |
423 @kindex TAB @r{(programming modes)} | |
37978
c41356c953a0
Correct names of some C mode indentation commands.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
37868
diff
changeset
|
424 @findex c-indent-command |
c41356c953a0
Correct names of some C mode indentation commands.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
37868
diff
changeset
|
425 @findex indent-line-function |
25829 | 426 The basic indentation command is @key{TAB}, which gives the current line |
427 the correct indentation as determined from the previous lines. The | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
428 function that @key{TAB} runs depends on the major mode; it is |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
429 @code{indent-for-tab-command} |
37978
c41356c953a0
Correct names of some C mode indentation commands.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
37868
diff
changeset
|
430 in Lisp mode, @code{c-indent-command} in C mode, etc. These functions |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
431 understand the syntax and conventions of different languages, but they all do |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
432 conceptually the same job: @key{TAB} in any programming-language major mode |
25829 | 433 inserts or deletes whitespace at the beginning of the current line, |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
434 independent of where point is in the line. If point was inside the |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
435 whitespace at the beginning of the line, @key{TAB} puts it at the end of |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
436 that whitespace; otherwise, @key{TAB} keeps point fixed with respect to |
25829 | 437 the characters around it. |
438 | |
439 Use @kbd{C-q @key{TAB}} to insert a tab at point. | |
440 | |
441 @kindex C-j | |
442 @findex newline-and-indent | |
38136
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
443 When entering lines of new code, use @kbd{C-j} |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
444 (@code{newline-and-indent}), which is equivalent to a @key{RET} |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
445 followed by a @key{TAB}. @kbd{C-j} at the end of a line creates a |
278f2295cde6
New node Program Misc; text about word and paragraph and selective
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38123
diff
changeset
|
446 blank line and then gives it the appropriate indentation. |
25829 | 447 |
448 @key{TAB} indents the second and following lines of the body of a | |
449 parenthetical grouping each under the preceding one; therefore, if you | |
450 alter one line's indentation to be nonstandard, the lines below will | |
451 tend to follow it. This behavior is convenient in cases where you have | |
452 overridden the standard result of @key{TAB} because you find it | |
453 unaesthetic for a particular line. | |
454 | |
455 Remember that an open-parenthesis, open-brace or other opening delimiter | |
456 at the left margin is assumed by Emacs (including the indentation routines) | |
457 to be the start of a function. Therefore, you must never have an opening | |
458 delimiter in column zero that is not the beginning of a function, not even | |
459 inside a string. This restriction is vital for making the indentation | |
460 commands fast; you must simply accept it. @xref{Defuns}, for more | |
461 information on this. | |
462 | |
38009
b6036155d1ca
(Basic Indent): Add a cross-reference to description of indent-tabs-mode.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37997
diff
changeset
|
463 Normally, lines are indented with tabs and spaces. If you want Emacs |
b6036155d1ca
(Basic Indent): Add a cross-reference to description of indent-tabs-mode.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37997
diff
changeset
|
464 to use spaces only, see @ref{Just Spaces}. |
b6036155d1ca
(Basic Indent): Add a cross-reference to description of indent-tabs-mode.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37997
diff
changeset
|
465 |
25829 | 466 @node Multi-line Indent |
467 @subsection Indenting Several Lines | |
468 | |
469 When you wish to reindent several lines of code which have been altered | |
470 or moved to a different level in the list structure, you have several | |
471 commands available. | |
472 | |
473 @table @kbd | |
474 @item C-M-q | |
475 Reindent all the lines within one list (@code{indent-sexp}). | |
476 @item C-u @key{TAB} | |
477 Shift an entire list rigidly sideways so that its first line | |
478 is properly indented. | |
479 @item C-M-\ | |
480 Reindent all lines in the region (@code{indent-region}). | |
38149
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
481 @item M-x indent-code-rigidly |
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
482 Shift all the lines in the region rigidly sideways, but do not alter |
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
483 lines that start inside comments and strings. |
25829 | 484 @end table |
485 | |
486 @kindex C-M-q | |
487 @findex indent-sexp | |
488 You can reindent the contents of a single list by positioning point | |
489 before the beginning of it and typing @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{indent-sexp} in | |
490 Lisp mode, @code{c-indent-exp} in C mode; also bound to other suitable | |
491 commands in other modes). The indentation of the line the sexp starts on | |
492 is not changed; therefore, only the relative indentation within the list, | |
493 and not its position, is changed. To correct the position as well, type a | |
494 @key{TAB} before the @kbd{C-M-q}. | |
495 | |
496 @kindex C-u TAB | |
497 If the relative indentation within a list is correct but the | |
498 indentation of its first line is not, go to that line and type @kbd{C-u | |
499 @key{TAB}}. @key{TAB} with a numeric argument reindents the current | |
500 line as usual, then reindents by the same amount all the lines in the | |
501 grouping starting on the current line. In other words, it reindents the | |
502 whole grouping rigidly as a unit. It is clever, though, and does not | |
503 alter lines that start inside strings, or C preprocessor lines when in C | |
504 mode. | |
505 | |
38149
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
506 @findex indent-code-rigidly |
25829 | 507 Another way to specify the range to be reindented is with the region. |
508 The command @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region}) applies @key{TAB} to | |
38149
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
509 every line whose first character is between point and mark. The command |
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
510 @kbd{M-x indent-code-rigidly} rigidly shifts all the lines in the region |
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
511 sideways, like @code{indent-rigidly} does (@pxref{Indentation |
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
512 Commands}), except that it doesn't alter the indentation of lines that |
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
513 start inside comments and strings, unless the region starts inside that |
a07facd0bdf8
(Multi-line Indent): Document indent-code-rigidly.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38148
diff
changeset
|
514 comment or string. |
25829 | 515 |
516 @node Lisp Indent | |
517 @subsection Customizing Lisp Indentation | |
518 @cindex customizing Lisp indentation | |
519 | |
520 The indentation pattern for a Lisp expression can depend on the function | |
521 called by the expression. For each Lisp function, you can choose among | |
522 several predefined patterns of indentation, or define an arbitrary one with | |
523 a Lisp program. | |
524 | |
525 The standard pattern of indentation is as follows: the second line of the | |
526 expression is indented under the first argument, if that is on the same | |
527 line as the beginning of the expression; otherwise, the second line is | |
528 indented underneath the function name. Each following line is indented | |
529 under the previous line whose nesting depth is the same. | |
530 | |
531 @vindex lisp-indent-offset | |
532 If the variable @code{lisp-indent-offset} is non-@code{nil}, it overrides | |
533 the usual indentation pattern for the second line of an expression, so that | |
534 such lines are always indented @code{lisp-indent-offset} more columns than | |
535 the containing list. | |
536 | |
537 @vindex lisp-body-indent | |
538 The standard pattern is overridden for certain functions. Functions | |
539 whose names start with @code{def} always indent the second line by | |
540 @code{lisp-body-indent} extra columns beyond the open-parenthesis | |
541 starting the expression. | |
542 | |
543 The standard pattern can be overridden in various ways for individual | |
544 functions, according to the @code{lisp-indent-function} property of the | |
545 function name. There are four possibilities for this property: | |
546 | |
547 @table @asis | |
548 @item @code{nil} | |
549 This is the same as no property; the standard indentation pattern is used. | |
550 @item @code{defun} | |
551 The pattern used for function names that start with @code{def} is used for | |
552 this function also. | |
553 @item a number, @var{number} | |
554 The first @var{number} arguments of the function are | |
555 @dfn{distinguished} arguments; the rest are considered the @dfn{body} | |
556 of the expression. A line in the expression is indented according to | |
557 whether the first argument on it is distinguished or not. If the | |
558 argument is part of the body, the line is indented @code{lisp-body-indent} | |
559 more columns than the open-parenthesis starting the containing | |
560 expression. If the argument is distinguished and is either the first | |
561 or second argument, it is indented @emph{twice} that many extra columns. | |
562 If the argument is distinguished and not the first or second argument, | |
563 the standard pattern is followed for that line. | |
564 @item a symbol, @var{symbol} | |
565 @var{symbol} should be a function name; that function is called to | |
566 calculate the indentation of a line within this expression. The | |
567 function receives two arguments: | |
568 @table @asis | |
569 @item @var{state} | |
570 The value returned by @code{parse-partial-sexp} (a Lisp primitive for | |
571 indentation and nesting computation) when it parses up to the | |
572 beginning of this line. | |
573 @item @var{pos} | |
574 The position at which the line being indented begins. | |
575 @end table | |
576 @noindent | |
577 It should return either a number, which is the number of columns of | |
578 indentation for that line, or a list whose car is such a number. The | |
579 difference between returning a number and returning a list is that a | |
580 number says that all following lines at the same nesting level should | |
581 be indented just like this one; a list says that following lines might | |
582 call for different indentations. This makes a difference when the | |
583 indentation is being computed by @kbd{C-M-q}; if the value is a | |
584 number, @kbd{C-M-q} need not recalculate indentation for the following | |
585 lines until the end of the list. | |
586 @end table | |
587 | |
588 @node C Indent | |
589 @subsection Commands for C Indentation | |
590 | |
591 Here are the commands for indentation in C mode and related modes: | |
592 | |
593 @table @code | |
594 @item C-c C-q | |
595 @kindex C-c C-q @r{(C mode)} | |
596 @findex c-indent-defun | |
597 Reindent the current top-level function definition or aggregate type | |
598 declaration (@code{c-indent-defun}). | |
599 | |
600 @item C-M-q | |
601 @kindex C-M-q @r{(C mode)} | |
602 @findex c-indent-exp | |
603 Reindent each line in the balanced expression that follows point | |
604 (@code{c-indent-exp}). A prefix argument inhibits error checking and | |
605 warning messages about invalid syntax. | |
606 | |
607 @item @key{TAB} | |
608 @findex c-indent-command | |
609 Reindent the current line, and/or in some cases insert a tab character | |
610 (@code{c-indent-command}). | |
611 | |
612 If @code{c-tab-always-indent} is @code{t}, this command always reindents | |
613 the current line and does nothing else. This is the default. | |
614 | |
615 If that variable is @code{nil}, this command reindents the current line | |
616 only if point is at the left margin or in the line's indentation; | |
617 otherwise, it inserts a tab (or the equivalent number of spaces, | |
618 if @code{indent-tabs-mode} is @code{nil}). | |
619 | |
620 Any other value (not @code{nil} or @code{t}) means always reindent the | |
621 line, and also insert a tab if within a comment, a string, or a | |
622 preprocessor directive. | |
623 | |
624 @item C-u @key{TAB} | |
625 Reindent the current line according to its syntax; also rigidly reindent | |
626 any other lines of the expression that starts on the current line. | |
627 @xref{Multi-line Indent}. | |
628 @end table | |
629 | |
630 To reindent the whole current buffer, type @kbd{C-x h C-M-\}. This | |
631 first selects the whole buffer as the region, then reindents that | |
632 region. | |
633 | |
634 To reindent the current block, use @kbd{C-M-u C-M-q}. This moves | |
635 to the front of the block and then reindents it all. | |
636 | |
637 @node Custom C Indent | |
638 @subsection Customizing C Indentation | |
639 | |
640 C mode and related modes use a simple yet flexible mechanism for | |
641 customizing indentation. The mechanism works in two steps: first it | |
642 classifies the line syntactically according to its contents and context; | |
643 second, it associates each kind of syntactic construct with an | |
644 indentation offset which you can customize. | |
645 | |
646 @menu | |
647 * Syntactic Analysis:: | |
648 * Indentation Calculation:: | |
649 * Changing Indent Style:: | |
650 * Syntactic Symbols:: | |
651 * Variables for C Indent:: | |
652 * C Indent Styles:: | |
653 @end menu | |
654 | |
655 @node Syntactic Analysis | |
656 @subsubsection Step 1---Syntactic Analysis | |
657 @cindex syntactic analysis | |
658 | |
659 In the first step, the C indentation mechanism looks at the line | |
660 before the one you are currently indenting and determines the syntactic | |
661 components of the construct on that line. It builds a list of these | |
662 syntactic components, each of which contains a @dfn{syntactic symbol} | |
663 and sometimes also a buffer position. Some syntactic symbols describe | |
664 grammatical elements, for example @code{statement} and | |
665 @code{substatement}; others describe locations amidst grammatical | |
666 elements, for example @code{class-open} and @code{knr-argdecl}. | |
667 | |
668 Conceptually, a line of C code is always indented relative to the | |
669 indentation of some line higher up in the buffer. This is represented | |
670 by the buffer positions in the syntactic component list. | |
671 | |
672 Here is an example. Suppose we have the following code in a C++ mode | |
673 buffer (the line numbers don't actually appear in the buffer): | |
674 | |
675 @example | |
676 1: void swap (int& a, int& b) | |
677 2: @{ | |
678 3: int tmp = a; | |
679 4: a = b; | |
680 5: b = tmp; | |
681 6: @} | |
682 @end example | |
683 | |
684 If you type @kbd{C-c C-s} (which runs the command | |
685 @code{c-show-syntactic-information}) on line 4, it shows the result of | |
686 the indentation mechanism for that line: | |
687 | |
688 @example | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
689 syntactic analysis: ((statement . 32)) |
25829 | 690 @end example |
691 | |
692 This indicates that the line is a statement and it is indented | |
693 relative to buffer position 32, which happens to be the @samp{i} in | |
694 @code{int} on line 3. If you move the cursor to line 3 and type | |
695 @kbd{C-c C-s}, it displays this: | |
696 | |
697 @example | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
698 syntactic analysis: ((defun-block-intro . 28)) |
25829 | 699 @end example |
700 | |
701 This indicates that the @code{int} line is the first statement in a | |
702 block, and is indented relative to buffer position 28, which is the | |
703 brace just after the function header. | |
704 | |
705 @noindent | |
706 Here is another example: | |
707 | |
708 @example | |
709 1: int add (int val, int incr, int doit) | |
710 2: @{ | |
711 3: if (doit) | |
712 4: @{ | |
713 5: return (val + incr); | |
714 6: @} | |
715 7: return (val); | |
716 8: @} | |
717 @end example | |
718 | |
719 @noindent | |
720 Typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 displays this: | |
721 | |
722 @example | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
723 syntactic analysis: ((substatement-open . 43)) |
25829 | 724 @end example |
725 | |
726 This says that the brace @emph{opens} a substatement block. By the | |
727 way, a @dfn{substatement} indicates the line after an @code{if}, | |
728 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{do}, @code{switch}, @code{for}, | |
729 @code{try}, @code{catch}, @code{finally}, or @code{synchronized} | |
730 statement. | |
731 | |
732 @cindex syntactic component | |
733 @cindex syntactic symbol | |
734 @vindex c-syntactic-context | |
735 Within the C indentation commands, after a line has been analyzed | |
736 syntactically for indentation, the variable @code{c-syntactic-context} | |
737 contains a list that describes the results. Each element in this list | |
738 is a @dfn{syntactic component}: a cons cell containing a syntactic | |
739 symbol and (optionally) its corresponding buffer position. There may be | |
740 several elements in a component list; typically only one element has a | |
741 buffer position. | |
742 | |
743 @node Indentation Calculation | |
744 @subsubsection Step 2---Indentation Calculation | |
745 @cindex Indentation Calculation | |
746 | |
747 The C indentation mechanism calculates the indentation for the current | |
748 line using the list of syntactic components, @code{c-syntactic-context}, | |
749 derived from syntactic analysis. Each component is a cons cell that | |
750 contains a syntactic symbol and may also contain a buffer position. | |
751 | |
752 Each component contributes to the final total indentation of the line | |
753 in two ways. First, the syntactic symbol identifies an element of | |
754 @code{c-offsets-alist}, which is an association list mapping syntactic | |
755 symbols into indentation offsets. Each syntactic symbol's offset adds | |
756 to the total indentation. Second, if the component includes a buffer | |
757 position, the column number of that position adds to the indentation. | |
758 All these offsets and column numbers, added together, give the total | |
759 indentation. | |
760 | |
761 The following examples demonstrate the workings of the C indentation | |
762 mechanism: | |
763 | |
764 @example | |
765 1: void swap (int& a, int& b) | |
766 2: @{ | |
767 3: int tmp = a; | |
768 4: a = b; | |
769 5: b = tmp; | |
770 6: @} | |
771 @end example | |
772 | |
773 Suppose that point is on line 3 and you type @key{TAB} to reindent the | |
774 line. As explained above (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}), the syntactic | |
775 component list for that line is: | |
776 | |
777 @example | |
778 ((defun-block-intro . 28)) | |
779 @end example | |
780 | |
781 In this case, the indentation calculation first looks up | |
782 @code{defun-block-intro} in the @code{c-offsets-alist} alist. Suppose | |
783 that it finds the integer 2; it adds this to the running total | |
784 (initialized to zero), yielding a updated total indentation of 2 spaces. | |
785 | |
786 The next step is to find the column number of buffer position 28. | |
787 Since the brace at buffer position 28 is in column zero, this adds 0 to | |
788 the running total. Since this line has only one syntactic component, | |
789 the total indentation for the line is 2 spaces. | |
790 | |
791 @example | |
792 1: int add (int val, int incr, int doit) | |
793 2: @{ | |
794 3: if (doit) | |
795 4: @{ | |
796 5: return(val + incr); | |
797 6: @} | |
798 7: return(val); | |
799 8: @} | |
800 @end example | |
801 | |
802 If you type @key{TAB} on line 4, the same process is performed, but | |
803 with different data. The syntactic component list for this line is: | |
804 | |
805 @example | |
806 ((substatement-open . 43)) | |
807 @end example | |
808 | |
809 Here, the indentation calculation's first job is to look up the | |
810 symbol @code{substatement-open} in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's assume | |
811 that the offset for this symbol is 2. At this point the running total | |
812 is 2 (0 + 2 = 2). Then it adds the column number of buffer position 43, | |
813 which is the @samp{i} in @code{if} on line 3. This character is in | |
814 column 2 on that line. Adding this yields a total indentation of 4 | |
815 spaces. | |
816 | |
817 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p | |
818 If a syntactic symbol in the analysis of a line does not appear in | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
819 @code{c-offsets-alist}, it is ignored. |
25829 | 820 |
821 @node Changing Indent Style | |
822 @subsubsection Changing Indentation Style | |
823 | |
824 There are two ways to customize the indentation style for the C-like | |
825 modes. First, you can select one of several predefined styles, each of | |
826 which specifies offsets for all the syntactic symbols. For more | |
827 flexibility, you can customize the handling of individual syntactic | |
828 symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols}, for a list of all defined syntactic | |
829 symbols. | |
830 | |
831 @table @kbd | |
832 @item M-x c-set-style @key{RET} @var{style} @key{RET} | |
833 Select predefined indentation style @var{style}. Type @kbd{?} when | |
834 entering @var{style} to see a list of supported styles; to find out what | |
38148
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
835 a style looks like, select it and reindent some C code, e.g., by typing |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
836 @key{TAB} at the leftmost column of a few lines. @xref{C Indent |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
837 Styles}, for more details about available styles and their |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
838 customizations. |
25829 | 839 |
840 @item C-c C-o @var{symbol} @key{RET} @var{offset} @key{RET} | |
841 Set the indentation offset for syntactic symbol @var{symbol} | |
842 (@code{c-set-offset}). The second argument @var{offset} specifies the | |
843 new indentation offset. | |
844 @end table | |
845 | |
846 The @code{c-offsets-alist} variable controls the amount of | |
847 indentation to give to each syntactic symbol. Its value is an | |
848 association list, and each element of the list has the form | |
849 @code{(@var{syntactic-symbol} . @var{offset})}. By changing the offsets | |
850 for various syntactic symbols, you can customize indentation in fine | |
851 detail. To change this alist, use @code{c-set-offset} (see below). | |
852 | |
853 Each offset value in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be an integer, a | |
854 function or variable name, a list, or one of the following symbols: @code{+}, | |
855 @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}, indicating positive or negative | |
856 multiples of the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. Thus, if you want to | |
857 change the levels of indentation to be 3 spaces instead of 2 spaces, set | |
858 @code{c-basic-offset} to 3. | |
859 | |
860 Using a function as the offset value provides the ultimate flexibility | |
861 in customizing indentation. The function is called with a single | |
862 argument containing the @code{cons} of the syntactic symbol and | |
863 the buffer position, if any. The function should return an integer | |
864 offset. | |
26264 | 865 |
25829 | 866 If the offset value is a list, its elements are processed according |
867 to the rules above until a non-@code{nil} value is found. That value is | |
868 then added to the total indentation in the normal manner. The primary | |
869 use for this is to combine the results of several functions. | |
870 | |
871 @kindex C-c C-o @r{(C mode)} | |
872 @findex c-set-offset | |
873 The command @kbd{C-c C-o} (@code{c-set-offset}) is the easiest way to | |
874 set offsets, both interactively or in your @file{~/.emacs} file. First | |
875 specify the syntactic symbol, then the offset you want. @xref{Syntactic | |
876 Symbols}, for a list of valid syntactic symbols and their meanings. | |
877 | |
878 @node Syntactic Symbols | |
879 @subsubsection Syntactic Symbols | |
880 | |
881 Here is a table of valid syntactic symbols for indentation in C and | |
882 related modes, with their syntactic meanings. Normally, most of these | |
883 symbols are assigned offsets in @code{c-offsets-alist}. | |
884 | |
885 @table @code | |
886 @item string | |
887 Inside a multi-line string. | |
888 | |
889 @item c | |
890 Inside a multi-line C style block comment. | |
891 | |
892 @item defun-open | |
893 On a brace that opens a function definition. | |
894 | |
895 @item defun-close | |
896 On a brace that closes a function definition. | |
897 | |
898 @item defun-block-intro | |
899 In the first line in a top-level defun. | |
900 | |
901 @item class-open | |
902 On a brace that opens a class definition. | |
903 | |
904 @item class-close | |
905 On a brace that closes a class definition. | |
906 | |
907 @item inline-open | |
908 On a brace that opens an in-class inline method. | |
909 | |
910 @item inline-close | |
911 On a brace that closes an in-class inline method. | |
912 | |
913 @item extern-lang-open | |
914 On a brace that opens an external language block. | |
915 | |
916 @item extern-lang-close | |
917 On a brace that closes an external language block. | |
918 | |
919 @item func-decl-cont | |
920 The region between a function definition's argument list and the defun | |
921 opening brace (excluding K&R function definitions). In C, you cannot | |
922 put anything but whitespace and comments between them; in C++ and Java, | |
923 @code{throws} declarations and other things can appear in this context. | |
924 | |
925 @item knr-argdecl-intro | |
926 On the first line of a K&R C argument declaration. | |
927 | |
928 @item knr-argdecl | |
929 In one of the subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. | |
930 | |
931 @item topmost-intro | |
932 On the first line in a topmost construct definition. | |
933 | |
934 @item topmost-intro-cont | |
935 On the topmost definition continuation lines. | |
936 | |
937 @item member-init-intro | |
938 On the first line in a member initialization list. | |
939 | |
940 @item member-init-cont | |
941 On one of the subsequent member initialization list lines. | |
942 | |
943 @item inher-intro | |
944 On the first line of a multiple inheritance list. | |
945 | |
946 @item inher-cont | |
947 On one of the subsequent multiple inheritance lines. | |
948 | |
949 @item block-open | |
950 On a statement block open brace. | |
951 | |
952 @item block-close | |
953 On a statement block close brace. | |
954 | |
955 @item brace-list-open | |
956 On the opening brace of an @code{enum} or @code{static} array list. | |
957 | |
958 @item brace-list-close | |
959 On the closing brace of an @code{enum} or @code{static} array list. | |
960 | |
961 @item brace-list-intro | |
962 On the first line in an @code{enum} or @code{static} array list. | |
963 | |
964 @item brace-list-entry | |
965 On one of the subsequent lines in an @code{enum} or @code{static} array | |
966 list. | |
967 | |
968 @item brace-entry-open | |
969 On one of the subsequent lines in an @code{enum} or @code{static} array | |
970 list, when the line begins with an open brace. | |
971 | |
972 @item statement | |
973 On an ordinary statement. | |
974 | |
975 @item statement-cont | |
976 On a continuation line of a statement. | |
977 | |
978 @item statement-block-intro | |
979 On the first line in a new statement block. | |
980 | |
981 @item statement-case-intro | |
982 On the first line in a @code{case} ``block.'' | |
983 | |
984 @item statement-case-open | |
985 On the first line in a @code{case} block starting with brace. | |
986 | |
987 @item inexpr-statement | |
988 On a statement block inside an expression. This is used for a GNU | |
989 extension to the C language, and for Pike special functions that take a | |
990 statement block as an argument. | |
991 | |
992 @item inexpr-class | |
993 On a class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous | |
994 classes and anonymous array initializers in Java. | |
995 | |
996 @item substatement | |
997 On the first line after an @code{if}, @code{while}, @code{for}, | |
998 @code{do}, or @code{else}. | |
999 | |
1000 @item substatement-open | |
1001 On the brace that opens a substatement block. | |
1002 | |
1003 @item case-label | |
1004 On a @code{case} or @code{default} label. | |
1005 | |
1006 @item access-label | |
1007 On a C++ @code{private}, @code{protected}, or @code{public} access label. | |
1008 | |
1009 @item label | |
1010 On any ordinary label. | |
1011 | |
1012 @item do-while-closure | |
1013 On the @code{while} that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct. | |
1014 | |
1015 @item else-clause | |
1016 On the @code{else} of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct. | |
1017 | |
1018 @item catch-clause | |
1019 On the @code{catch} and @code{finally} lines in | |
1020 @code{try}@dots{}@code{catch} constructs in C++ and Java. | |
1021 | |
1022 @item comment-intro | |
1023 On a line containing only a comment introduction. | |
1024 | |
1025 @item arglist-intro | |
1026 On the first line in an argument list. | |
1027 | |
1028 @item arglist-cont | |
1029 On one of the subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on | |
1030 the same line as the arglist opening parenthesis. | |
1031 | |
1032 @item arglist-cont-nonempty | |
1033 On one of the subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument | |
1034 follows on the same line as the arglist opening parenthesis. | |
1035 | |
1036 @item arglist-close | |
1037 On the closing parenthesis of an argument list. | |
1038 | |
1039 @item stream-op | |
1040 On one of the lines continuing a stream operator construct. | |
1041 | |
1042 @item inclass | |
1043 On a construct that is nested inside a class definition. The | |
1044 indentation is relative to the open brace of the class definition. | |
1045 | |
1046 @item inextern-lang | |
1047 On a construct that is nested inside an external language block. | |
1048 | |
1049 @item inexpr-statement | |
1050 On the first line of statement block inside an expression. This is used | |
1051 for the GCC extension to C that uses the syntax @code{(@{ @dots{} @})}. | |
1052 It is also used for the special functions that takes a statement block | |
1053 as an argument in Pike. | |
1054 | |
1055 @item inexpr-class | |
1056 On the first line of a class definition inside an expression. This is | |
1057 used for anonymous classes and anonymous array initializers in Java. | |
1058 | |
1059 @item cpp-macro | |
1060 On the start of a cpp macro. | |
1061 | |
1062 @item friend | |
1063 On a C++ @code{friend} declaration. | |
1064 | |
1065 @item objc-method-intro | |
1066 On the first line of an Objective-C method definition. | |
1067 | |
1068 @item objc-method-args-cont | |
1069 On one of the lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. | |
1070 | |
1071 @item objc-method-call-cont | |
1072 On one of the lines continuing an Objective-C method call. | |
1073 | |
1074 @item inlambda | |
1075 Like @code{inclass}, but used inside lambda (i.e. anonymous) functions. Only | |
1076 used in Pike. | |
1077 | |
1078 @item lambda-intro-cont | |
1079 On a line continuing the header of a lambda function, between the | |
1080 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike. | |
1081 @end table | |
1082 | |
1083 @node Variables for C Indent | |
1084 @subsubsection Variables for C Indentation | |
1085 | |
1086 This section describes additional variables which control the | |
1087 indentation behavior of C mode and related mode. | |
1088 | |
1089 @table @code | |
1090 @item c-offsets-alist | |
1091 @vindex c-offsets-alist | |
1092 Association list of syntactic symbols and their indentation offsets. | |
1093 You should not set this directly, only with @code{c-set-offset}. | |
1094 @xref{Changing Indent Style}, for details. | |
1095 | |
1096 @item c-style-alist | |
1097 @vindex c-style-alist | |
1098 Variable for defining indentation styles; see below. | |
1099 | |
1100 @item c-basic-offset | |
1101 @vindex c-basic-offset | |
1102 Amount of basic offset used by @code{+} and @code{-} symbols in | |
26264 | 1103 @code{c-offsets-alist}.@refill |
25829 | 1104 |
1105 @item c-special-indent-hook | |
1106 @vindex c-special-indent-hook | |
1107 Hook for user-defined special indentation adjustments. This hook is | |
1108 called after a line is indented by C mode and related modes. | |
1109 @end table | |
1110 | |
1111 The variable @code{c-style-alist} specifies the predefined indentation | |
1112 styles. Each element has form @code{(@var{name} | |
1113 @var{variable-setting}@dots{})}, where @var{name} is the name of the | |
1114 style. Each @var{variable-setting} has the form @code{(@var{variable} | |
1115 . @var{value})}; @var{variable} is one of the customization variables | |
1116 used by C mode, and @var{value} is the value for that variable when | |
1117 using the selected style. | |
1118 | |
1119 When @var{variable} is @code{c-offsets-alist}, that is a special case: | |
1120 @var{value} is appended to the front of the value of @code{c-offsets-alist} | |
1121 instead of replacing that value outright. Therefore, it is not necessary | |
1122 for @var{value} to specify each and every syntactic symbol---only those | |
1123 for which the style differs from the default. | |
1124 | |
1125 The indentation of lines containing only comments is also affected by | |
1126 the variable @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comments in C}). | |
1127 | |
1128 @node C Indent Styles | |
1129 @subsubsection C Indentation Styles | |
1130 @cindex c indentation styles | |
1131 | |
1132 A @dfn{C style} is a collection of indentation style customizations. | |
1133 Emacs comes with several predefined indentation styles for C and related | |
1134 modes, including @code{gnu}, @code{k&r}, @code{bsd}, @code{stroustrup}, | |
1135 @code{linux}, @code{python}, @code{java}, @code{whitesmith}, | |
28627
1f6ba3e73fe9
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28391
diff
changeset
|
1136 @code{ellemtel}, @code{cc-mode}, and @code{user}. |
25829 | 1137 |
1138 @findex c-set-style | |
1139 To choose the style you want, use the command @kbd{M-x c-set-style}. | |
1140 Specify a style name as an argument (case is not significant in C style | |
1141 names). The chosen style only affects newly visited buffers, not those | |
38148
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1142 you are already editing; to reindent an existing buffer, switch to that |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1143 buffer and type @kbd{C-x h C-M-\}. |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1144 |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1145 @vindex c-default-style |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1146 You can also set the variable @code{c-default-style} to specify the |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1147 style for various major modes. Its value should be an alist, in which |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1148 each element specifies one major mode and which indentation style to use |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1149 for it. For example, |
25829 | 1150 |
1151 @example | |
1152 (setq c-default-style | |
1153 '((java-mode . "java") (other . "gnu"))) | |
1154 @end example | |
1155 | |
1156 @noindent | |
1157 specifies an explicit choice for Java mode, and the default @samp{gnu} | |
1158 style for the other C-like modes. | |
1159 | |
38148
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1160 The @code{gnu} style defines the formatting recommend by the GNU |
28627
1f6ba3e73fe9
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28391
diff
changeset
|
1161 Project; it is the default, so as to encourage the indentation we |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1162 recommend. However, if you make changes in variables such as |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1163 @code{c-basic-offset} and @code{c-offsets-alist} in your |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1164 @file{~/.emacs} file, your changes override the what @code{gnu} style |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1165 says. |
28627
1f6ba3e73fe9
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28391
diff
changeset
|
1166 |
25829 | 1167 @findex c-add-style |
1168 To define a new C indentation style, call the function | |
1169 @code{c-add-style}: | |
1170 | |
1171 @example | |
1172 (c-add-style @var{name} @var{values} @var{use-now}) | |
1173 @end example | |
1174 | |
1175 @noindent | |
1176 Here @var{name} is the name of the new style (a string), and | |
1177 @var{values} is an alist whose elements have the form | |
1178 @code{(@var{variable} . @var{value})}. The variables you specify should | |
1179 be among those documented in @ref{Variables for C Indent}. | |
1180 | |
28627
1f6ba3e73fe9
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28391
diff
changeset
|
1181 If @var{use-now} is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-add-style} selects the new |
1f6ba3e73fe9
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
28391
diff
changeset
|
1182 style after defining it. |
25829 | 1183 |
1184 @node Matching | |
1185 @section Automatic Display Of Matching Parentheses | |
1186 @cindex matching parentheses | |
1187 @cindex parentheses, displaying matches | |
1188 | |
1189 The Emacs parenthesis-matching feature is designed to show | |
1190 automatically how parentheses match in the text. Whenever you type a | |
1191 self-inserting character that is a closing delimiter, the cursor moves | |
1192 momentarily to the location of the matching opening delimiter, provided | |
1193 that is on the screen. If it is not on the screen, some text near it is | |
1194 displayed in the echo area. Either way, you can tell what grouping is | |
1195 being closed off. | |
1196 | |
1197 In Lisp, automatic matching applies only to parentheses. In C, it | |
1198 applies to braces and brackets too. Emacs knows which characters to regard | |
1199 as matching delimiters based on the syntax table, which is set by the major | |
1200 mode. @xref{Syntax}. | |
1201 | |
1202 If the opening delimiter and closing delimiter are mismatched---such as | |
1203 in @samp{[x)}---a warning message is displayed in the echo area. The | |
1204 correct matches are specified in the syntax table. | |
1205 | |
1206 @vindex blink-matching-paren | |
1207 @vindex blink-matching-paren-distance | |
1208 @vindex blink-matching-delay | |
1209 Three variables control parenthesis match display. | |
1210 @code{blink-matching-paren} turns the feature on or off; @code{nil} | |
1211 turns it off, but the default is @code{t} to turn match display on. | |
38148
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1212 @code{blink-matching-delay} says how many seconds to wait after moving |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1213 the cursor to the matching open parenthesis, before moving it back; the |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1214 default is 1, but on some systems it is useful to specify a fraction of |
071d97105015
Proofreading fixes from Peter Milliken.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
38136
diff
changeset
|
1215 a second. @code{blink-matching-paren-distance} specifies how many |
25829 | 1216 characters back to search to find the matching opening delimiter. If |
1217 the match is not found in that far, scanning stops, and nothing is | |
1218 displayed. This is to prevent scanning for the matching delimiter from | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1219 wasting lots of time when there is no match. The default is 25600. |
25829 | 1220 |
1221 @cindex Show Paren mode | |
34122
c42bb7d4437b
Don't tell that show-paren only works on X. Explain how to customize
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31188
diff
changeset
|
1222 @cindex highlighting matching parentheses |
25829 | 1223 @findex show-paren-mode |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1224 Show Paren mode provides a more powerful kind of automatic |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1225 parenthesis matching. Whenever point is after a close parenthesis, |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1226 the close parenthesis and its matching open parenthesis are both |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1227 highlighted; otherwise, if point is before an open parenthesis, the |
34122
c42bb7d4437b
Don't tell that show-paren only works on X. Explain how to customize
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31188
diff
changeset
|
1228 matching close parenthesis is highlighted. (There is no need to |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1229 highlight the open parenthesis after point because the cursor appears |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1230 on top of that character.) Use the command @kbd{M-x show-paren-mode} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1231 to enable or disable this mode. |
34122
c42bb7d4437b
Don't tell that show-paren only works on X. Explain how to customize
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31188
diff
changeset
|
1232 |
c42bb7d4437b
Don't tell that show-paren only works on X. Explain how to customize
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31188
diff
changeset
|
1233 By default, @code{show-paren-mode} uses colors to highlight the |
c42bb7d4437b
Don't tell that show-paren only works on X. Explain how to customize
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31188
diff
changeset
|
1234 parentheses. However, if your display doesn't support colors, you can |
c42bb7d4437b
Don't tell that show-paren only works on X. Explain how to customize
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31188
diff
changeset
|
1235 customize the faces @code{show-paren-match-face} and |
c42bb7d4437b
Don't tell that show-paren only works on X. Explain how to customize
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31188
diff
changeset
|
1236 @code{show-paren-mismatch-face} to use other attributes, such as bold or |
c42bb7d4437b
Don't tell that show-paren only works on X. Explain how to customize
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31188
diff
changeset
|
1237 underline. @xref{Face Customization}. |
25829 | 1238 |
1239 @node Comments | |
1240 @section Manipulating Comments | |
1241 @cindex comments | |
1242 | |
1243 Because comments are such an important part of programming, Emacs | |
1244 provides special commands for editing and inserting comments. | |
1245 | |
1246 @menu | |
1247 * Comment Commands:: | |
1248 * Multi-Line Comments:: | |
1249 * Options for Comments:: | |
1250 @end menu | |
1251 | |
1252 @node Comment Commands | |
1253 @subsection Comment Commands | |
1254 @cindex indentation for comments | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1255 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1256 The comment commands in this table insert, kill and align comments. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1257 They are described in this section and following sections. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1258 |
25829 | 1259 @table @kbd |
1260 @item M-; | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1261 Insert or realign comment on current line; alternatively, comment or |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1262 uncomment the region (@code{comment-dwim}). |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1263 @item C-u M-; |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1264 Kill comment on current line (@code{comment-kill}). |
25829 | 1265 @item C-x ; |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1266 Set comment column (@code{comment-set-column}). |
25829 | 1267 @item C-M-j |
1268 Like @key{RET} followed by inserting and aligning a comment | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1269 (@code{comment-indent-new-line}). |
25829 | 1270 @item M-x comment-region |
1271 Add or remove comment delimiters on all the lines in the region. | |
1272 @end table | |
1273 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1274 @kindex M-; |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1275 @findex comment-dwim |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1276 The command to create or align a comment is @kbd{M-;} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1277 (@code{comment-dwim}). The word ``dwim'' is an acronym for ``Do What |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1278 I Mean''; it indicates that this command can be used for many |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1279 different jobs relating to comments, depending on the situation where |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1280 you use it. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1281 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1282 If there is no comment already on the line, @kbd{M-;} inserts a new |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1283 comment, aligned at a specific column called the @dfn{comment column}. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1284 The new comment begins with the string Emacs thinks comments should |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1285 start with (the value of @code{comment-start}; see below). Point is |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1286 after that string, so you can insert the text of the comment right |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1287 away. If the major mode has specified a string to terminate comments, |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1288 @kbd{M-;} inserts that too, to keep the syntax valid. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1289 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1290 If the text of the line extends past the comment column, then the |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1291 comment start string is indented to a suitable boundary (usually, at |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1292 least one space is inserted). |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1293 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1294 You can also use @kbd{M-;} to align an existing comment. If a line |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1295 already contains the comment-start string, @kbd{M-;} reindents it to |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1296 the conventional alignment and moves point after it. (Exception: |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1297 comments starting in column 0 are not moved.) Even when an existing |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1298 comment is properly aligned, @kbd{M-;} is still useful for moving |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1299 directly to the start of the text inside the comment. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1300 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1301 @findex comment-kill |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1302 @kindex C-u M-; |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1303 @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line, along with the |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1304 whitespace before it. To reinsert the comment on another line, move |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1305 to the end of that line, do @kbd{C-y}, and then do @kbd{M-;} to |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1306 realign it. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1307 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1308 Note that @kbd{C-u M-;} is not a distinct key; it is @kbd{M-;} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1309 (@code{comment-dwim}) with a prefix argument. That command is |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1310 programmed so that when it receives a prefix argument it calls |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1311 @code{comment-kill}. However, @code{comment-kill} is a valid command |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1312 in its own right, and you can bind it directly to a key if you wish. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1313 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1314 @kbd{M-;} does two other jobs when used with an active region in |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1315 Transient Mark mode (@pxref{Transient Mark}). Then it either adds or |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1316 removes comment delimiters on each line of the region. (If every line |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1317 is a comment, it removes comment delimiters from each; otherwise, it |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1318 adds comment delimiters to each.) If you are not using Transient Mark |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1319 mode, then you should use the commands @code{comment-region} and |
36198 | 1320 @code{uncomment-region} to do these jobs (@pxref{Multi-Line Comments}). |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1321 A prefix argument used in these circumstances specifies how many |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1322 comment delimiters to add or how many to delete. |
25829 | 1323 |
1324 Some major modes have special rules for indenting certain kinds of | |
1325 comments in certain contexts. For example, in Lisp code, comments which | |
1326 start with two semicolons are indented as if they were lines of code, | |
1327 instead of at the comment column. Comments which start with three | |
1328 semicolons are supposed to start at the left margin. Emacs understands | |
1329 these conventions by indenting a double-semicolon comment using @key{TAB}, | |
1330 and by not changing the indentation of a triple-semicolon comment at all. | |
1331 | |
1332 @example | |
1333 ;; This function is just an example | |
1334 ;;; Here either two or three semicolons are appropriate. | |
1335 (defun foo (x) | |
1336 ;;; And now, the first part of the function: | |
1337 ;; The following line adds one. | |
1338 (1+ x)) ; This line adds one. | |
1339 @end example | |
1340 | |
1341 In C code, a comment preceded on its line by nothing but whitespace | |
1342 is indented like a line of code. | |
1343 | |
1344 @node Multi-Line Comments | |
1345 @subsection Multiple Lines of Comments | |
1346 | |
1347 @kindex C-M-j | |
1348 @cindex blank lines in programs | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1349 @findex comment-indent-new-line |
25829 | 1350 If you are typing a comment and wish to continue it on another line, |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1351 you can use the command @kbd{C-M-j} (@code{comment-indent-new-line}). |
25829 | 1352 This terminates the comment you are typing, creates a new blank line |
1353 afterward, and begins a new comment indented under the old one. When | |
1354 Auto Fill mode is on, going past the fill column while typing a comment | |
1355 causes the comment to be continued in just this fashion. If point is | |
1356 not at the end of the line when @kbd{C-M-j} is typed, the text on | |
1357 the rest of the line becomes part of the new comment line. | |
1358 | |
1359 @findex comment-region | |
1360 To turn existing lines into comment lines, use the @kbd{M-x | |
1361 comment-region} command. It adds comment delimiters to the lines that start | |
1362 in the region, thus commenting them out. With a negative argument, it | |
1363 does the opposite---it deletes comment delimiters from the lines in the | |
1364 region. | |
1365 | |
1366 With a positive argument, @code{comment-region} duplicates the last | |
1367 character of the comment start sequence it adds; the argument specifies | |
1368 how many copies of the character to insert. Thus, in Lisp mode, | |
1369 @kbd{C-u 2 M-x comment-region} adds @samp{;;} to each line. Duplicating | |
1370 the comment delimiter is a way of calling attention to the comment. It | |
1371 can also affect how the comment is indented. In Lisp, for proper | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1372 indentation, you should use an argument of two or three, if between defuns; |
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1373 if within a defun, it must be three. |
25829 | 1374 |
1375 @node Options for Comments | |
1376 @subsection Options Controlling Comments | |
1377 | |
1378 @vindex comment-column | |
1379 @kindex C-x ; | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1380 @findex comment-set-column |
25829 | 1381 The comment column is stored in the variable @code{comment-column}. You |
1382 can set it to a number explicitly. Alternatively, the command @kbd{C-x ;} | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1383 (@code{comment-set-column}) sets the comment column to the column point is |
25829 | 1384 at. @kbd{C-u C-x ;} sets the comment column to match the last comment |
1385 before point in the buffer, and then does a @kbd{M-;} to align the | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1386 current line's comment under the previous one. |
25829 | 1387 |
1388 The variable @code{comment-column} is per-buffer: setting the variable | |
1389 in the normal fashion affects only the current buffer, but there is a | |
1390 default value which you can change with @code{setq-default}. | |
1391 @xref{Locals}. Many major modes initialize this variable for the | |
1392 current buffer. | |
1393 | |
1394 @vindex comment-start-skip | |
1395 The comment commands recognize comments based on the regular | |
1396 expression that is the value of the variable @code{comment-start-skip}. | |
1397 Make sure this regexp does not match the null string. It may match more | |
1398 than the comment starting delimiter in the strictest sense of the word; | |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1399 for example, in C mode the value of the variable is |
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1400 @c This stops M-q from breaking the line inside that @code. |
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1401 @code{@w{"/\\*+ *\\|//+ *""}}, which matches extra stars and spaces |
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1402 after the @samp{/*} itself, and accepts C++ style comments also. |
25829 | 1403 (Note that @samp{\\} is needed in Lisp syntax to include a @samp{\} in |
1404 the string, which is needed to deny the first star its special meaning | |
1405 in regexp syntax. @xref{Regexps}.) | |
1406 | |
1407 @vindex comment-start | |
1408 @vindex comment-end | |
1409 When a comment command makes a new comment, it inserts the value of | |
1410 @code{comment-start} to begin it. The value of @code{comment-end} is | |
1411 inserted after point, so that it will follow the text that you will insert | |
1412 into the comment. In C mode, @code{comment-start} has the value | |
1413 @w{@code{"/* "}} and @code{comment-end} has the value @w{@code{" */"}}. | |
1414 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1415 @vindex comment-padding |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1416 The variable @code{comment-padding} specifies how many spaces |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1417 @code{comment-region} should insert on each line between the |
38018
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1418 comment delimiter and the line's original text. The default is 1, |
f802bdff6c2c
Update various command names and variable defaults.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
38009
diff
changeset
|
1419 to insert one space. |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1420 |
25829 | 1421 @vindex comment-multi-line |
1422 The variable @code{comment-multi-line} controls how @kbd{C-M-j} | |
1423 (@code{indent-new-comment-line}) behaves when used inside a comment. If | |
1424 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, as it normally is, then the | |
1425 comment on the starting line is terminated and a new comment is started | |
1426 on the new following line. If @code{comment-multi-line} is not | |
1427 @code{nil}, then the new following line is set up as part of the same | |
1428 comment that was found on the starting line. This is done by not | |
1429 inserting a terminator on the old line, and not inserting a starter on | |
1430 the new line. In languages where multi-line comments work, the choice | |
1431 of value for this variable is a matter of taste. | |
1432 | |
1433 @vindex comment-indent-function | |
1434 The variable @code{comment-indent-function} should contain a function | |
1435 that will be called to compute the indentation for a newly inserted | |
1436 comment or for aligning an existing comment. It is set differently by | |
1437 various major modes. The function is called with no arguments, but with | |
1438 point at the beginning of the comment, or at the end of a line if a new | |
1439 comment is to be inserted. It should return the column in which the | |
1440 comment ought to start. For example, in Lisp mode, the indent hook | |
1441 function bases its decision on how many semicolons begin an existing | |
1442 comment, and on the code in the preceding lines. | |
1443 | |
1444 @node Balanced Editing | |
1445 @section Editing Without Unbalanced Parentheses | |
1446 | |
1447 @table @kbd | |
1448 @item M-( | |
1449 Put parentheses around next sexp(s) (@code{insert-parentheses}). | |
1450 @item M-) | |
1451 Move past next close parenthesis and reindent | |
1452 (@code{move-past-close-and-reindent}). | |
1453 @end table | |
1454 | |
1455 @kindex M-( | |
1456 @kindex M-) | |
1457 @findex insert-parentheses | |
1458 @findex move-past-close-and-reindent | |
1459 The commands @kbd{M-(} (@code{insert-parentheses}) and @kbd{M-)} | |
1460 (@code{move-past-close-and-reindent}) are designed to facilitate a style | |
1461 of editing which keeps parentheses balanced at all times. @kbd{M-(} | |
1462 inserts a pair of parentheses, either together as in @samp{()}, or, if | |
1463 given an argument, around the next several sexps. It leaves point after | |
1464 the open parenthesis. The command @kbd{M-)} moves past the close | |
1465 parenthesis, deleting any indentation preceding it, and indenting with | |
1466 @kbd{C-j} after it. | |
1467 | |
1468 For example, instead of typing @kbd{( F O O )}, you can type @kbd{M-( | |
1469 F O O}, which has the same effect except for leaving the cursor before | |
1470 the close parenthesis. | |
1471 | |
1472 @vindex parens-require-spaces | |
1473 @kbd{M-(} may insert a space before the open parenthesis, depending on | |
1474 the syntax class of the preceding character. Set | |
1475 @code{parens-require-spaces} to @code{nil} value if you wish to inhibit | |
1476 this. | |
1477 | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
1478 @findex check-parens |
31035
64a11267ce9a
check-parens can also find unbalanced quotes in strings.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31033
diff
changeset
|
1479 @cindex unbalanced parentheses and quotes |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1480 You can use @kbd{M-x check-parens} to find any unbalanced |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1481 parentheses and unbalanced string quotes in a buffer. |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
1482 |
25829 | 1483 @node Symbol Completion |
1484 @section Completion for Symbol Names | |
1485 @cindex completion (symbol names) | |
1486 | |
1487 Usually completion happens in the minibuffer. But one kind of completion | |
1488 is available in all buffers: completion for symbol names. | |
1489 | |
1490 @kindex M-TAB | |
1491 The character @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} runs a command to complete the partial | |
1492 symbol before point against the set of meaningful symbol names. Any | |
1493 additional characters determined by the partial name are inserted at | |
1494 point. | |
1495 | |
1496 If the partial name in the buffer has more than one possible completion | |
1497 and they have no additional characters in common, a list of all possible | |
1498 completions is displayed in another window. | |
1499 | |
36263
11db0318031d
Remove redundant index entries.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36198
diff
changeset
|
1500 @cindex tags-based completion |
25829 | 1501 @cindex Info index completion |
1502 @findex complete-symbol | |
1503 In most programming language major modes, @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} runs the | |
1504 command @code{complete-symbol}, which provides two kinds of completion. | |
1505 Normally it does completion based on a tags table (@pxref{Tags}); with a | |
1506 numeric argument (regardless of the value), it does completion based on | |
1507 the names listed in the Info file indexes for your language. Thus, to | |
1508 complete the name of a symbol defined in your own program, use | |
1509 @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} with no argument; to complete the name of a standard | |
1510 library function, use @kbd{C-u M-@key{TAB}}. Of course, Info-based | |
1511 completion works only if there is an Info file for the standard library | |
1512 functions of your language, and only if it is installed at your site. | |
1513 | |
1514 @cindex Lisp symbol completion | |
36263
11db0318031d
Remove redundant index entries.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36198
diff
changeset
|
1515 @cindex completion (Lisp symbols) |
25829 | 1516 @findex lisp-complete-symbol |
1517 In Emacs-Lisp mode, the name space for completion normally consists of | |
1518 nontrivial symbols present in Emacs---those that have function | |
1519 definitions, values or properties. However, if there is an | |
1520 open-parenthesis immediately before the beginning of the partial symbol, | |
1521 only symbols with function definitions are considered as completions. | |
1522 The command which implements this is @code{lisp-complete-symbol}. | |
1523 | |
1524 In Text mode and related modes, @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} completes words | |
1525 based on the spell-checker's dictionary. @xref{Spelling}. | |
1526 | |
1527 @node Which Function | |
1528 @section Which Function Mode | |
1529 | |
1530 Which Function mode is a minor mode that displays the current function | |
1531 name in the mode line, as you move around in a buffer. | |
1532 | |
1533 @findex which-function-mode | |
1534 @vindex which-func-modes | |
1535 To enable (or disable) Which Function mode, use the command @kbd{M-x | |
1536 which-function-mode}. This command is global; it applies to all | |
1537 buffers, both existing ones and those yet to be created. However, this | |
1538 only affects certain major modes, those listed in the value of | |
1539 @code{which-func-modes}. (If the value is @code{t}, then Which Function | |
1540 mode applies to all major modes that know how to support it---which are | |
1541 the major modes that support Imenu.) | |
1542 | |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1543 @node Hideshow |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1544 @section Hideshow minor mode |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1545 |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1546 @findex hs-minor-mode |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1547 Hideshow minor mode provides selective display of portions of a |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1548 file, known as @dfn{blocks}. You can use @kbd{M-x hs-minor-mode} to |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1549 enable or disable this mode, or add @code{hs-minor-mode} to the mode |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1550 hook for certain major modes in order to enable it automatically for |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1551 those modes. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1552 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1553 Just what constitutes a block depends on the major mode. In C mode |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1554 or C++ mode, they are delimited by braces, while in Lisp mode and |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1555 similar modes they are delimited by parentheses. Multi-line comments |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1556 also count as blocks. |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1557 |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1558 @findex hs-hide-all |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1559 @findex hs-hide-block |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1560 @findex hs-show-all |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1561 @findex hs-show-block |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1562 @findex hs-show-region |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1563 @findex hs-hide-level |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1564 @findex hs-minor-mode |
37997
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1565 @kindex C-c @@ C-h |
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1566 @kindex C-c @@ C-s |
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1567 @kindex C-c @@ C-M-h |
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1568 @kindex C-c @@ C-M-s |
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1569 @kindex C-c @@ C-r |
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1570 @kindex C-c @@ C-l |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1571 @kindex S-Mouse-2 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1572 @table @kbd |
37997
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1573 @item C-c @@ C-h |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1574 Hide the current block (@code{hs-hide-block}). |
37997
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1575 @item C-c @@ C-s |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1576 Show the current block (@code{hs-show-block}). |
37997
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1577 @item C-c @@ C-c |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1578 Either hide or show the current block (@code{hs-toggle-hiding}) |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1579 @item S-Mouse-2 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1580 Either hide or show the block you click on (@code{hs-mouse-toggle-hiding}) |
37997
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1581 @item C-c @@ C-M-h |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1582 Hide all top-level blocks (@code{hs-hide-all}). |
37997
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1583 @item C-c @@ C-M-s |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1584 Show everything in the buffer (@code{hs-show-all}). |
37997
c329103798cc
(Hideshow): Fix the docs of keybindings which used a single `@'.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
37978
diff
changeset
|
1585 @item C-c @@ C-l |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1586 Hide all blocks @var{n} levels below this block |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1587 (@code{hs-hide-level}). |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1588 @end table |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1589 |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1590 @vindex hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1591 @vindex hs-isearch-open |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1592 @vindex hs-special-modes-alist |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1593 These user options exist for customizing Hideshow mode. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1594 |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1595 @table @code |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1596 @item hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1597 Non-@code{nil} says that @kbd{hs-hide-all} should hide comments too. |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1598 @item hs-isearch-open |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1599 Specifies what kind of hidden blocks to open in Isearch mode. |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1600 @item hs-special-modes-alist |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1601 Specifies |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1602 Initializes Hideshow variables for different modes. |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1603 @end table |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1604 |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1605 @node Glasses |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1606 @section Glasses minor mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1607 @cindex Glasses mode |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1608 @cindex identifiers, making long ones readable |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1609 @cindex StudlyCaps, making them readable |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1610 @findex glasses-mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1611 |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1612 Glasses minor mode makes @samp{unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1613 readable by altering the display. It can do this in two different |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1614 ways: by displaying underscores between an lower-case letter and the |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1615 following capital letter, or by emboldening the capital letters. It |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1616 does not alter the buffer text, only the way they display, so you can |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1617 use it even on read-only buffers. You can use the command @kbd{M-x |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1618 glasses-mode} to enable or disable the mode; you can also add |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1619 @code{glasses-mode} to the mode hook of appropriate programming |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1620 language major modes. |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1621 |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1622 @node Documentation |
25829 | 1623 @section Documentation Commands |
1624 | |
1625 As you edit Lisp code to be run in Emacs, the commands @kbd{C-h f} | |
1626 (@code{describe-function}) and @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}) can | |
1627 be used to print documentation of functions and variables that you want to | |
1628 call. These commands use the minibuffer to read the name of a function or | |
1629 variable to document, and display the documentation in a window. | |
1630 | |
1631 For extra convenience, these commands provide default arguments based on | |
1632 the code in the neighborhood of point. @kbd{C-h f} sets the default to the | |
1633 function called in the innermost list containing point. @kbd{C-h v} uses | |
1634 the symbol name around or adjacent to point as its default. | |
1635 | |
1636 @cindex Eldoc mode | |
1637 @findex eldoc-mode | |
1638 For Emacs Lisp code, you can also use Eldoc mode. This minor mode | |
1639 constantly displays in the echo area the argument list for the function | |
1640 being called at point. (In other words, it finds the function call that | |
1641 point is contained in, and displays the argument list of that function.) | |
1642 Eldoc mode applies in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only. Use | |
1643 the command @kbd{M-x eldoc-mode} to enable or disable this feature. | |
1644 | |
1645 @findex info-lookup-symbol | |
1646 @findex info-lookup-file | |
1647 @kindex C-h C-i | |
1648 For C, Lisp, and other languages, you can use @kbd{C-h C-i} | |
1649 (@code{info-lookup-symbol}) to view the Info documentation for a symbol. | |
1650 You specify the symbol with the minibuffer; by default, it uses the | |
1651 symbol that appears in the buffer at point. The major mode determines | |
1652 where to look for documentation for the symbol---which Info files and | |
1653 which indices. You can also use @kbd{M-x info-lookup-file} to look for | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1654 documentation for a file name. Currently this supports the following |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1655 modes: Awk, Autoconf, Bison, C, Emacs Lisp, LaTeX, M4, |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1656 Makefile, Octave, Perl, Scheme and Texinfo, provided you have installed |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1657 the relevant Info files, which are typically available with the appropriate GNU |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
1658 package. |
25829 | 1659 |
1660 @findex manual-entry | |
28838
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1661 @cindex manual pages |
25829 | 1662 You can read the ``man page'' for an operating system command, library |
1663 function, or system call, with the @kbd{M-x manual-entry} command. It | |
1664 runs the @code{man} program to format the man page, and runs it | |
1665 asynchronously if your system permits, so that you can keep on editing | |
1666 while the page is being formatted. (MS-DOS and MS-Windows 3 do not | |
1667 permit asynchronous subprocesses, so on these systems you cannot edit | |
1668 while Emacs waits for @code{man} to exit.) The result goes in a buffer | |
1669 named @samp{*Man @var{topic}*}. These buffers use a special major mode, | |
1670 Man mode, that facilitates scrolling and examining other manual pages. | |
1671 For details, type @kbd{C-h m} while in a man page buffer. | |
1672 | |
29840
53f07097269e
(Documentation Commands): Explain how to get a man page from
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
29107
diff
changeset
|
1673 @cindex sections of manual pages |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1674 Man pages are classified into @dfn{sections}; sometimes there are |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1675 man pages with the same name in different sections. To read a man |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1676 page from a specific section, type @samp{@var{topic}(@var{section})} or |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1677 @samp{@var{section} @var{topic}} when @kbd{M-x manual-entry} prompts |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1678 for the topic. For example, to read the man page for the C library |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1679 function @code{chmod} (as opposed to a command by the same name), type |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1680 @kbd{M-x manual-entry @key{RET} chmod(2v) @key{RET}} (assuming |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1681 @code{chmod} is in section @samp{2v}). |
29840
53f07097269e
(Documentation Commands): Explain how to get a man page from
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
29107
diff
changeset
|
1682 |
29854
ca9f6085d33b
(Documentation): Describe how man pages with
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
29840
diff
changeset
|
1683 If you do not specify a section, the results depend on how the |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1684 @code{man} command works on your system. Some of them display only |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1685 the first man page they find. Others display all man pages that have |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1686 the specified name, so you can page between them with the @kbd{M-n} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1687 and @kbd{M-p} keys. The mode line shows how many manual pages are |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1688 available in the Man buffer. |
29854
ca9f6085d33b
(Documentation): Describe how man pages with
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
29840
diff
changeset
|
1689 |
25829 | 1690 @vindex Man-fontify-manpage-flag |
1691 For a long man page, setting the faces properly can take substantial | |
1692 time. By default, Emacs uses faces in man pages if Emacs can display | |
1693 different fonts or colors. You can turn off use of faces in man pages | |
1694 by setting the variable @code{Man-fontify-manpage-flag} to @code{nil}. | |
1695 | |
1696 @findex Man-fontify-manpage | |
1697 If you insert the text of a man page into an Emacs buffer in some | |
1698 other fashion, you can use the command @kbd{M-x Man-fontify-manpage} to | |
1699 perform the same conversions that @kbd{M-x manual-entry} does. | |
1700 | |
28838
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1701 @findex woman |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1702 @cindex manual pages, on MS-DOS/MS-Windows |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1703 An alternative way of reading manual pages is the @kbd{M-x woman} |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1704 command@footnote{The name of the command, @code{woman}, is an acronym |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1705 for ``w/o (without) man,'' since it doesn't use the @code{man} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1706 program.}. Unlike @kbd{M-x man}, it does not run any external |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1707 programs to format and display the man pages; instead it does the job |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1708 in Emacs Lisp, so it works on systems such as MS-Windows, where the |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1709 @code{man} program and other the programs it needs are not readily |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1710 available. @kbd{M-x woman} prompts for a name of a manual page, and |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1711 provides completion based on the list of manual pages that are |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1712 installed on your machine; the list of available manual pages is |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1713 computed automatically the first time you invoke @code{woman}. The |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1714 word at point in the current buffer is used to suggest the default |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1715 name of the manual page. |
28838
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1716 |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1717 With a numeric argument, @kbd{M-x woman} recomputes the list of the |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1718 manual pages used for completion. This is useful if you add or delete |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1719 manual pages. |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1720 |
29840
53f07097269e
(Documentation Commands): Explain how to get a man page from
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
29107
diff
changeset
|
1721 If you type a name of a manual page and @kbd{M-x woman} finds that |
53f07097269e
(Documentation Commands): Explain how to get a man page from
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
29107
diff
changeset
|
1722 several manual pages by the same name exist in different sections, it |
53f07097269e
(Documentation Commands): Explain how to get a man page from
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
29107
diff
changeset
|
1723 pops up a window with possible candidates asking you to choose one of |
53f07097269e
(Documentation Commands): Explain how to get a man page from
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
29107
diff
changeset
|
1724 them. |
53f07097269e
(Documentation Commands): Explain how to get a man page from
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
29107
diff
changeset
|
1725 |
28838
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1726 @vindex woman-manpath |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1727 By default, @kbd{M-x woman} looks up the manual pages in directories |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1728 listed by the @code{MANPATH} environment variable. (If @code{MANPATH} |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1729 is not set, @code{woman} uses a suitable default value, which can be |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1730 customized.) More precisely, @code{woman} looks for subdirectories that |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1731 match the shell wildcard @file{man*} in each one of these directories, |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1732 and tries to find the manual pages in those subdirectories. When first |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1733 invoked, @kbd{M-x woman} converts the value of @code{MANPATH} to a list |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1734 of directory names and stores that list in the @code{woman-manpath} |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1735 variable. By changing the value of this variable, you can customize the |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1736 list of directories where @code{woman} looks for manual pages. |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1737 |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1738 @vindex woman-path |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1739 In addition, you can augment the list of directories searched by |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1740 @code{woman} by setting the value of the @code{woman-path} variable. |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1741 This variable should hold a list of specific directories which |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1742 @code{woman} should search, in addition to those in |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1743 @code{woman-manpath}. Unlike @code{woman-manpath}, the directories in |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1744 @code{woman-path} are searched for the manual pages, not for @file{man*} |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1745 subdirectories. |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1746 |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1747 @findex woman-find-file |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1748 Occasionally, you might need to display manual pages that are not in |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1749 any of the directories listed by @code{woman-manpath} and |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1750 @code{woman-path}. The @kbd{M-x woman-find-file} command prompts for a |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1751 name of a manual page file, with completion, and then formats and |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1752 displays that file like @kbd{M-x woman} does. |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1753 |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1754 @vindex woman-dired-keys |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1755 First time you invoke @kbd{M-x woman}, it defines the Dired @kbd{W} |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1756 key to run the @code{woman-find-file} command on the current line's |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1757 file. You can disable this by setting the variable |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1758 @code{woman-dired-keys} to @code{nil}. @xref{Dired}. In addition, the |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1759 Tar-mode @kbd{w} key is bound to @code{woman-find-file} on the current |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1760 line's archive member. |
e3d33a77c205
(Documentation): Document woman.el features.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
28627
diff
changeset
|
1761 |
30668
9c402b90b24d
(Documentation): Add an xref to woman's own manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30049
diff
changeset
|
1762 For more information about setting up and using @kbd{M-x woman}, see |
9c402b90b24d
(Documentation): Add an xref to woman's own manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30049
diff
changeset
|
1763 @ref{Top, WoMan, Browse UN*X Manual Pages WithOut Man, woman, The WoMan |
9c402b90b24d
(Documentation): Add an xref to woman's own manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30049
diff
changeset
|
1764 Manual}. |
9c402b90b24d
(Documentation): Add an xref to woman's own manual.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30049
diff
changeset
|
1765 |
25829 | 1766 Eventually the GNU project hopes to replace most man pages with |
1767 better-organized manuals that you can browse with Info. @xref{Misc | |
1768 Help}. Since this process is only partially completed, it is still | |
1769 useful to read manual pages. | |
1770 | |
1771 @node Change Log | |
1772 @section Change Logs | |
1773 | |
1774 @cindex change log | |
1775 @kindex C-x 4 a | |
1776 @findex add-change-log-entry-other-window | |
1777 The Emacs command @kbd{C-x 4 a} adds a new entry to the change log | |
1778 file for the file you are editing | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1779 (@code{add-change-log-entry-other-window}). If that file is actually |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1780 a backup file, it makes an entry appropriate for the file's |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1781 parent---that is useful for making log entries for functions that |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1782 have been deleted in the current version. |
25829 | 1783 |
1784 A change log file contains a chronological record of when and why you | |
1785 have changed a program, consisting of a sequence of entries describing | |
1786 individual changes. Normally it is kept in a file called | |
1787 @file{ChangeLog} in the same directory as the file you are editing, or | |
1788 one of its parent directories. A single @file{ChangeLog} file can | |
1789 record changes for all the files in its directory and all its | |
1790 subdirectories. | |
1791 | |
1792 A change log entry starts with a header line that contains your name, | |
1793 your email address (taken from the variable @code{user-mail-address}), | |
1794 and the current date and time. Aside from these header lines, every | |
1795 line in the change log starts with a space or a tab. The bulk of the | |
1796 entry consists of @dfn{items}, each of which starts with a line starting | |
1797 with whitespace and a star. Here are two entries, both dated in May | |
1798 1993, each with two items: | |
1799 | |
1800 @iftex | |
1801 @medbreak | |
1802 @end iftex | |
1803 @smallexample | |
1804 1993-05-25 Richard Stallman <rms@@gnu.org> | |
1805 | |
1806 * man.el: Rename symbols `man-*' to `Man-*'. | |
1807 (manual-entry): Make prompt string clearer. | |
1808 | |
1809 * simple.el (blink-matching-paren-distance): | |
1810 Change default to 12,000. | |
1811 | |
1812 1993-05-24 Richard Stallman <rms@@gnu.org> | |
1813 | |
1814 * vc.el (minor-mode-map-alist): Don't use it if it's void. | |
1815 (vc-cancel-version): Doc fix. | |
1816 @end smallexample | |
1817 | |
1818 One entry can describe several changes; each change should have its | |
1819 own item. Normally there should be a blank line between items. When | |
1820 items are related (parts of the same change, in different places), group | |
1821 them by leaving no blank line between them. The second entry above | |
1822 contains two items grouped in this way. | |
1823 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1824 @kbd{C-x 4 a} visits the change log file and creates a new entry |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1825 unless the most recent entry is for today's date and your name. It |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1826 also creates a new item for the current file. For many languages, it |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1827 can even guess the name of the function or other object that was |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1828 changed. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1829 |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
1830 @vindex add-log-keep-changes-together |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1831 When the option @code{add-log-keep-changes-together} is |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1832 non-@code{nil}, @kbd{C-x 4 a} adds to any existing entry for the file |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1833 rather than starting a new entry. |
25829 | 1834 |
31052
b05772d7c2ad
Document change-log-version-info-enabled and
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31035
diff
changeset
|
1835 @vindex change-log-version-info-enabled |
b05772d7c2ad
Document change-log-version-info-enabled and
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31035
diff
changeset
|
1836 @vindex change-log-version-number-regexp-list |
b05772d7c2ad
Document change-log-version-info-enabled and
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31035
diff
changeset
|
1837 @cindex file version in change log entries |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1838 If the value of the variable @code{change-log-version-info-enabled} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1839 is non-@code{nil}, @kbd{C-x 4 a} ads the file's version number to the |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1840 change log entry. It finds the version number by searching the first |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1841 ten percent of the file, using regular expressions from the variable |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1842 @code{change-log-version-number-regexp-list}. |
31052
b05772d7c2ad
Document change-log-version-info-enabled and
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31035
diff
changeset
|
1843 |
25829 | 1844 @cindex Change Log mode |
1845 @findex change-log-mode | |
1846 The change log file is visited in Change Log mode. In this major | |
1847 mode, each bunch of grouped items counts as one paragraph, and each | |
1848 entry is considered a page. This facilitates editing the entries. | |
1849 @kbd{C-j} and auto-fill indent each new line like the previous line; | |
1850 this is convenient for entering the contents of an entry. | |
1851 | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
1852 @findex change-log-merge |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1853 You can use the command @kbd{M-x change-log-merge} to merge other |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1854 log files into a buffer in Change Log Mode, preserving the date |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1855 ordering of entries. |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
1856 |
30850
befd90253848
Document the new change-log-redate command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30810
diff
changeset
|
1857 @findex change-log-redate |
befd90253848
Document the new change-log-redate command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30810
diff
changeset
|
1858 @cindex converting change log date style |
30968
2dfd4d6a9043
Remove redundant description of change-log-redate.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30850
diff
changeset
|
1859 Versions of Emacs before 20.1 used a different format for the time of |
2dfd4d6a9043
Remove redundant description of change-log-redate.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30850
diff
changeset
|
1860 the change log entry: |
30850
befd90253848
Document the new change-log-redate command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30810
diff
changeset
|
1861 |
befd90253848
Document the new change-log-redate command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30810
diff
changeset
|
1862 @smallexample |
befd90253848
Document the new change-log-redate command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30810
diff
changeset
|
1863 Fri May 25 11:23:23 1993 Richard Stallman <rms@@gnu.org> |
befd90253848
Document the new change-log-redate command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30810
diff
changeset
|
1864 @end smallexample |
befd90253848
Document the new change-log-redate command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30810
diff
changeset
|
1865 |
befd90253848
Document the new change-log-redate command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30810
diff
changeset
|
1866 @noindent |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1867 The @kbd{M-x change-log-redate} command converts all the old-style |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1868 date entries in the change log file visited in the current buffer to |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1869 the new format, to make the file uniform in style. This is handy when |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1870 entries are contributed by many different people, some of whom use old |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1871 versions of Emacs. |
30850
befd90253848
Document the new change-log-redate command.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
30810
diff
changeset
|
1872 |
25829 | 1873 Version control systems are another way to keep track of changes in your |
1874 program and keep a change log. @xref{Log Buffer}. | |
1875 | |
30793 | 1876 @node Authors |
1877 @section @file{AUTHORS} files | |
1878 @cindex @file{AUTHORS} file | |
1879 | |
1880 Programs which have many contributors usually include a file named | |
1881 @file{AUTHORS} in their distribution, which lists the individual | |
1882 contributions. Emacs has a special command for maintaining the | |
1883 @file{AUTHORS} file that is part of the Emacs distribution. | |
1884 | |
1885 @findex authors | |
1886 The @kbd{M-x authors} command prompts for the name of the root of the | |
1887 Emacs source directory. It then scans @file{ChageLog} files and Lisp | |
1888 source files under that directory for information about authors of | |
1889 individual packages and people who made changes in source files, and | |
1890 puts the information it gleans into a buffer named @samp{*Authors*}. | |
1891 You can then edit the contents of that buffer and merge it with the | |
1892 exisiting @file{AUTHORS} file. | |
1893 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1894 Do not assume that this command finds all the contributors; don't |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1895 assume that a person not listed in the output was not a contributor. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1896 If you merged in someone's contribution and did not put his name |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1897 in the change log, he won't show up in @kbd{M-x authors} either. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1898 |
25829 | 1899 @node Tags |
1900 @section Tags Tables | |
1901 @cindex tags table | |
1902 | |
1903 A @dfn{tags table} is a description of how a multi-file program is | |
1904 broken up into files. It lists the names of the component files and the | |
1905 names and positions of the functions (or other named subunits) in each | |
1906 file. Grouping the related files makes it possible to search or replace | |
1907 through all the files with one command. Recording the function names | |
1908 and positions makes possible the @kbd{M-.} command which finds the | |
1909 definition of a function by looking up which of the files it is in. | |
1910 | |
1911 Tags tables are stored in files called @dfn{tags table files}. The | |
1912 conventional name for a tags table file is @file{TAGS}. | |
1913 | |
1914 Each entry in the tags table records the name of one tag, the name of the | |
1915 file that the tag is defined in (implicitly), and the position in that file | |
1916 of the tag's definition. | |
1917 | |
1918 Just what names from the described files are recorded in the tags table | |
1919 depends on the programming language of the described file. They | |
36737
71af0a08c2cc
Mention that file names are tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36263
diff
changeset
|
1920 normally include all file names, functions and subroutines, and may |
71af0a08c2cc
Mention that file names are tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36263
diff
changeset
|
1921 also include global variables, data types, and anything else |
71af0a08c2cc
Mention that file names are tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
36263
diff
changeset
|
1922 convenient. Each name recorded is called a @dfn{tag}. |
25829 | 1923 |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1924 @cindex C++ class browser, tags |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1925 @cindex tags, C++ |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1926 @cindex class browser, C++ |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1927 @cindex Ebrowse |
37868
ac2238e335f8
Fix some xrefs to other manuals.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
36786
diff
changeset
|
1928 See also the Ebrowse facility, which is tailored for C++. |
ac2238e335f8
Fix some xrefs to other manuals.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
36786
diff
changeset
|
1929 @xref{Top,, Ebrowse, ebrowse, Ebrowse User's Manual}. |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
1930 |
25829 | 1931 @menu |
26264 | 1932 * Tag Syntax:: Tag syntax for various types of code and text files. |
25829 | 1933 * Create Tags Table:: Creating a tags table with @code{etags}. |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
1934 * Etags Regexps:: Create arbitrary tags using regular expressions. |
25829 | 1935 * Select Tags Table:: How to visit a tags table. |
26264 | 1936 * Find Tag:: Commands to find the definition of a specific tag. |
25829 | 1937 * Tags Search:: Using a tags table for searching and replacing. |
1938 * List Tags:: Listing and finding tags defined in a file. | |
1939 @end menu | |
1940 | |
1941 @node Tag Syntax | |
1942 @subsection Source File Tag Syntax | |
1943 | |
1944 Here is how tag syntax is defined for the most popular languages: | |
1945 | |
1946 @itemize @bullet | |
1947 @item | |
1948 In C code, any C function or typedef is a tag, and so are definitions of | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1949 @code{struct}, @code{union} and @code{enum}. |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1950 @code{#define} macro definitions and @code{enum} constants are also |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1951 tags, unless you specify @samp{--no-defines} when making the tags table. |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1952 Similarly, global variables are tags, unless you specify |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1953 @samp{--no-globals}. Use of @samp{--no-globals} and @samp{--no-defines} |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
1954 can make the tags table file much smaller. |
25829 | 1955 |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1956 You can tag function declarations and external variables in addition |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1957 to function definitions by giving the @samp{--declarations} option to |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1958 @code{etags}. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1959 |
25829 | 1960 @item |
1961 In C++ code, in addition to all the tag constructs of C code, member | |
1962 functions are also recognized, and optionally member variables if you | |
1963 use the @samp{--members} option. Tags for variables and functions in | |
1964 classes are named @samp{@var{class}::@var{variable}} and | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1965 @samp{@var{class}::@var{function}}. @code{operator} definitions have |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
1966 tag names like @samp{operator+}. |
25829 | 1967 |
1968 @item | |
1969 In Java code, tags include all the constructs recognized in C++, plus | |
26264 | 1970 the @code{interface}, @code{extends} and @code{implements} constructs. |
1971 Tags for variables and functions in classes are named | |
1972 @samp{@var{class}.@var{variable}} and @samp{@var{class}.@var{function}}. | |
25829 | 1973 |
1974 @item | |
1975 In La@TeX{} text, the argument of any of the commands @code{\chapter}, | |
1976 @code{\section}, @code{\subsection}, @code{\subsubsection}, | |
1977 @code{\eqno}, @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, | |
1978 @code{\part}, @code{\appendix}, @code{\entry}, or @code{\index}, is a | |
1979 tag.@refill | |
1980 | |
1981 Other commands can make tags as well, if you specify them in the | |
29107 | 1982 environment variable @env{TEXTAGS} before invoking @code{etags}. The |
25829 | 1983 value of this environment variable should be a colon-separated list of |
1984 command names. For example, | |
1985 | |
1986 @example | |
1987 TEXTAGS="def:newcommand:newenvironment" | |
1988 export TEXTAGS | |
1989 @end example | |
1990 | |
1991 @noindent | |
1992 specifies (using Bourne shell syntax) that the commands @samp{\def}, | |
1993 @samp{\newcommand} and @samp{\newenvironment} also define tags. | |
1994 | |
1995 @item | |
1996 In Lisp code, any function defined with @code{defun}, any variable | |
1997 defined with @code{defvar} or @code{defconst}, and in general the first | |
1998 argument of any expression that starts with @samp{(def} in column zero, is | |
1999 a tag. | |
2000 | |
2001 @item | |
2002 In Scheme code, tags include anything defined with @code{def} or with a | |
2003 construct whose name starts with @samp{def}. They also include variables | |
2004 set with @code{set!} at top level in the file. | |
2005 @end itemize | |
2006 | |
2007 Several other languages are also supported: | |
2008 | |
2009 @itemize @bullet | |
26264 | 2010 |
2011 @item | |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2012 In Ada code, functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and types are |
35298
f5b916018b7e
Added instructions for use of Ada tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
2013 tags. Use the @samp{--packages-only} option to create tags for |
f5b916018b7e
Added instructions for use of Ada tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
2014 packages only. |
f5b916018b7e
Added instructions for use of Ada tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
2015 |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2016 In Ada, the same name can be used for different kinds of entity |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2017 (e.g.@:, for a procedure and for a function). Also, for things like |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2018 packages, procedures and functions, there is the spec (i.e.@: the |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2019 interface) and the body (i.e.@: the implementation). To make it |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2020 easier to pick the definition you want, Ada tag name have suffixes |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2021 indicating the type of entity: |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2022 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2023 @table @samp |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2024 @item /b |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2025 package body. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2026 @item /f |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2027 function. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2028 @item /k |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2029 task. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2030 @item /p |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2031 procedure. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2032 @item /s |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2033 package spec. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2034 @item /t |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2035 type. |
35298
f5b916018b7e
Added instructions for use of Ada tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
2036 @end table |
f5b916018b7e
Added instructions for use of Ada tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35297
diff
changeset
|
2037 |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2038 Thus, @kbd{M-x find-tag @key{RET} bidule/b @key{RET}} will go |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2039 directly to the body of the package @code{bidule}, while @kbd{M-x |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2040 find-tag @key{RET} bidule @key{RET}} will just search for any tag |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2041 @code{bidule}. |
26264 | 2042 |
25829 | 2043 @item |
2044 In assembler code, labels appearing at the beginning of a line, | |
2045 followed by a colon, are tags. | |
2046 | |
2047 @item | |
2048 In Bison or Yacc input files, each rule defines as a tag the nonterminal | |
2049 it constructs. The portions of the file that contain C code are parsed | |
2050 as C code. | |
2051 | |
2052 @item | |
2053 In Cobol code, tags are paragraph names; that is, any word starting in | |
2054 column 8 and followed by a period. | |
2055 | |
2056 @item | |
2057 In Erlang code, the tags are the functions, records, and macros defined | |
2058 in the file. | |
2059 | |
2060 @item | |
2061 In Fortran code, functions, subroutines and blockdata are tags. | |
2062 | |
2063 @item | |
35297
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35059
diff
changeset
|
2064 In makefiles, targets are tags. |
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35059
diff
changeset
|
2065 |
e268b7b500f0
Changes for makefile support in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
35059
diff
changeset
|
2066 @item |
25829 | 2067 In Objective C code, tags include Objective C definitions for classes, |
2068 class categories, methods, and protocols. | |
2069 | |
2070 @item | |
2071 In Pascal code, the tags are the functions and procedures defined in | |
2072 the file. | |
2073 | |
2074 @item | |
26264 | 2075 In Perl code, the tags are the procedures defined by the @code{sub}, |
2076 @code{my} and @code{local} keywords. Use @samp{--globals} if you want | |
2077 to tag global variables. | |
25829 | 2078 |
2079 @item | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
2080 In PostScript code, the tags are the functions. |
25829 | 2081 |
2082 @item | |
2083 In Prolog code, a tag name appears at the left margin. | |
2084 | |
26264 | 2085 @item |
2086 In Python code, @code{def} or @code{class} at the beginning of a line | |
2087 generate a tag. | |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2088 @end itemize |
26264 | 2089 |
26462 | 2090 You can also generate tags based on regexp matching (@pxref{Etags |
26264 | 2091 Regexps}) to handle other formats and languages. |
25829 | 2092 |
2093 @node Create Tags Table | |
2094 @subsection Creating Tags Tables | |
2095 @cindex @code{etags} program | |
2096 | |
2097 The @code{etags} program is used to create a tags table file. It knows | |
2098 the syntax of several languages, as described in | |
2099 @iftex | |
2100 the previous section. | |
2101 @end iftex | |
2102 @ifinfo | |
2103 @ref{Tag Syntax}. | |
2104 @end ifinfo | |
2105 Here is how to run @code{etags}: | |
2106 | |
2107 @example | |
2108 etags @var{inputfiles}@dots{} | |
2109 @end example | |
2110 | |
2111 @noindent | |
26264 | 2112 The @code{etags} program reads the specified files, and writes a tags |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2113 table named @file{TAGS} in the current working directory. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2114 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2115 If the specified files don't exist, @code{etags} looks for |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2116 compressed versions of them and uncompresses them to read them. Under |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2117 MS-DOS, @code{etags} also looks for file names like @file{mycode.cgz} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2118 if it is given @samp{mycode.c} on the command line and @file{mycode.c} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2119 does not exist. |
26264 | 2120 |
2121 @code{etags} recognizes the language used in an input file based on | |
2122 its file name and contents. You can specify the language with the | |
25829 | 2123 @samp{--language=@var{name}} option, described below. |
2124 | |
2125 If the tags table data become outdated due to changes in the files | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2126 described in the table, the way to update the tags table is the same |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2127 way it was made in the first place. But it is not necessary to do |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2128 this very often. |
25829 | 2129 |
2130 If the tags table fails to record a tag, or records it for the wrong | |
2131 file, then Emacs cannot possibly find its definition. However, if the | |
2132 position recorded in the tags table becomes a little bit wrong (due to | |
2133 some editing in the file that the tag definition is in), the only | |
2134 consequence is a slight delay in finding the tag. Even if the stored | |
2135 position is very wrong, Emacs will still find the tag, but it must | |
2136 search the entire file for it. | |
2137 | |
2138 So you should update a tags table when you define new tags that you want | |
2139 to have listed, or when you move tag definitions from one file to another, | |
2140 or when changes become substantial. Normally there is no need to update | |
2141 the tags table after each edit, or even every day. | |
2142 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2143 One tags table can virtually include another. Specify the included |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2144 tags file name with the @samp{--include=@var{file}} option when |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2145 creating the file that is to include it. The latter file then acts as |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2146 if it covered all the source files specified in the included file, as |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2147 well as the files it directly contains. |
25829 | 2148 |
2149 If you specify the source files with relative file names when you run | |
2150 @code{etags}, the tags file will contain file names relative to the | |
2151 directory where the tags file was initially written. This way, you can | |
2152 move an entire directory tree containing both the tags file and the | |
2153 source files, and the tags file will still refer correctly to the source | |
2154 files. | |
2155 | |
2156 If you specify absolute file names as arguments to @code{etags}, then | |
2157 the tags file will contain absolute file names. This way, the tags file | |
2158 will still refer to the same files even if you move it, as long as the | |
2159 source files remain in the same place. Absolute file names start with | |
2160 @samp{/}, or with @samp{@var{device}:/} on MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
2161 | |
2162 When you want to make a tags table from a great number of files, you | |
2163 may have problems listing them on the command line, because some systems | |
2164 have a limit on its length. The simplest way to circumvent this limit | |
2165 is to tell @code{etags} to read the file names from its standard input, | |
2166 by typing a dash in place of the file names, like this: | |
2167 | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2168 @smallexample |
25829 | 2169 find . -name "*.[chCH]" -print | etags - |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2170 @end smallexample |
25829 | 2171 |
2172 Use the option @samp{--language=@var{name}} to specify the language | |
2173 explicitly. You can intermix these options with file names; each one | |
2174 applies to the file names that follow it. Specify | |
2175 @samp{--language=auto} to tell @code{etags} to resume guessing the | |
2176 language from the file names and file contents. Specify | |
2177 @samp{--language=none} to turn off language-specific processing | |
26264 | 2178 entirely; then @code{etags} recognizes tags by regexp matching alone |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2179 (@pxref{Etags Regexps}). |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2180 |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2181 @samp{etags --help} prints the list of the languages @code{etags} |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2182 knows, and the file name rules for guessing the language. It also prints |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2183 a list of all the available @code{etags} options, together with a short |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2184 explanation. |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2185 |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2186 @node Etags Regexps |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2187 @subsection Etags Regexps |
25829 | 2188 |
2189 The @samp{--regex} option provides a general way of recognizing tags | |
2190 based on regexp matching. You can freely intermix it with file names. | |
2191 Each @samp{--regex} option adds to the preceding ones, and applies only | |
2192 to the following files. The syntax is: | |
2193 | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2194 @smallexample |
25829 | 2195 --regex=/@var{tagregexp}[/@var{nameregexp}]/ |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2196 @end smallexample |
26264 | 2197 |
25829 | 2198 @noindent |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2199 where @var{tagregexp} is used to match the lines to tag. It is always |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2200 anchored, that is, it behaves as if preceded by @samp{^}. If you want |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2201 to account for indentation, just match any initial number of blanks by |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2202 beginning your regular expression with @samp{[ \t]*}. In the regular |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2203 expressions, @samp{\} quotes the next character, and @samp{\t} stands |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2204 for the tab character. Note that @code{etags} does not handle the other |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2205 C escape sequences for special characters. |
25829 | 2206 |
2207 @cindex interval operator (in regexps) | |
2208 The syntax of regular expressions in @code{etags} is the same as in | |
2209 Emacs, augmented with the @dfn{interval operator}, which works as in | |
2210 @code{grep} and @code{ed}. The syntax of an interval operator is | |
2211 @samp{\@{@var{m},@var{n}\@}}, and its meaning is to match the preceding | |
2212 expression at least @var{m} times and up to @var{n} times. | |
2213 | |
2214 You should not match more characters with @var{tagregexp} than that | |
2215 needed to recognize what you want to tag. If the match is such that | |
26106 | 2216 more characters than needed are unavoidably matched by @var{tagregexp} |
2217 (as will usually be the case), you should add a @var{nameregexp}, to | |
2218 pick out just the tag. This will enable Emacs to find tags more | |
2219 accurately and to do completion on tag names more reliably. You can | |
2220 find some examples below. | |
2221 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2222 The option @samp{--ignore-case-regex} (or @samp{-c}) works like |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2223 @samp{--regex}, except that matching ignores case. This is |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2224 appropriate for certain programming languages. |
25829 | 2225 |
2226 The @samp{-R} option deletes all the regexps defined with | |
2227 @samp{--regex} options. It applies to the file names following it, as | |
2228 you can see from the following example: | |
2229 | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2230 @smallexample |
25829 | 2231 etags --regex=/@var{reg1}/ voo.doo --regex=/@var{reg2}/ \ |
2232 bar.ber -R --lang=lisp los.er | |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2233 @end smallexample |
25829 | 2234 |
2235 @noindent | |
2236 Here @code{etags} chooses the parsing language for @file{voo.doo} and | |
2237 @file{bar.ber} according to their contents. @code{etags} also uses | |
2238 @var{reg1} to recognize additional tags in @file{voo.doo}, and both | |
2239 @var{reg1} and @var{reg2} to recognize additional tags in | |
2240 @file{bar.ber}. @code{etags} uses the Lisp tags rules, and no regexp | |
2241 matching, to recognize tags in @file{los.er}. | |
2242 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2243 You can specify a regular expression for a particular language, by |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2244 writing @samp{@{lang@}} in front of it. Then @code{etags} will use |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2245 the regular expression only for files of that language. (@samp{etags |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2246 --help} prints the list of languages recognised by @code{etags}.) The |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2247 following example tags the @code{DEFVAR} macros in the Emacs source |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2248 files, for the C language only: |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2249 |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2250 @smallexample |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2251 --regex='@{c@}/[ \t]*DEFVAR_[A-Z_ \t(]+"\([^"]+\)"/' |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2252 @end smallexample |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2253 |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2254 @noindent |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2255 This feature is particularly useful when you store a list of regular |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2256 expressions in a file. The following option syntax instructs |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2257 @code{etags} to read two files of regular expressions. The regular |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2258 expressions contained in the second file are matched without regard to |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2259 case. |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2260 |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2261 @smallexample |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2262 --regex=@@first-file --ignore-case-regex=@@second-file |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2263 @end smallexample |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2264 |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2265 @noindent |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2266 A regex file contains one regular expressions per line. Empty lines, |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2267 and lines beginning with space or tab are ignored. When the first |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2268 character in a line is @samp{@@}, @code{etags} assumes that the rest |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2269 of the line is the name of a file of regular expressions; thus, one |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2270 such file can include another file. All the other lines are taken to |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2271 be regular expressions. If the first non-whitespace text on the line |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2272 is @samp{--}, that line is a comment. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2273 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2274 For example, one can create a file called @samp{emacs.tags} with the |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2275 following contents: |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2276 |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2277 @smallexample |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2278 -- This is for GNU Emacs C source files |
26289
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2279 @{c@}/[ \t]*DEFVAR_[A-Z_ \t(]+"\([^"]+\)"/\1/ |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2280 @end smallexample |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2281 |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2282 @noindent |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2283 and then use it like this: |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2284 |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2285 @smallexample |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2286 etags --regex=@@emacs.tags *.[ch] */*.[ch] |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2287 @end smallexample |
6651db4a4b1f
Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26264
diff
changeset
|
2288 |
25829 | 2289 Here are some more examples. The regexps are quoted to protect them |
2290 from shell interpretation. | |
2291 | |
2292 @itemize @bullet | |
2293 | |
2294 @item | |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2295 Tag Octave files: |
25829 | 2296 |
2297 @smallexample | |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2298 etags --language=none \ |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2299 --regex='/[ \t]*function.*=[ \t]*\([^ \t]*\)[ \t]*(/\1/' \ |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2300 --regex='/###key \(.*\)/\1/' \ |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2301 --regex='/[ \t]*global[ \t].*/' \ |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2302 *.m |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2303 @end smallexample |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2304 |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2305 @noindent |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2306 Note that tags are not generated for scripts, so that you have to add |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2307 a line by yourself of the form @samp{###key @var{scriptname}} if you |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2308 want to jump to it. |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2309 |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2310 @item |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2311 Tag Tcl files: |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2312 |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2313 @smallexample |
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2314 etags --language=none --regex='/proc[ \t]+\([^ \t]+\)/\1/' *.tcl |
25829 | 2315 @end smallexample |
2316 | |
2317 @item | |
26292
81cd0c225dd9
Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents:
26289
diff
changeset
|
2318 Tag VHDL files: |
25829 | 2319 |
2320 @smallexample | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2321 etags --language=none \ |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2322 --regex='/[ \t]*\(ARCHITECTURE\|CONFIGURATION\) +[^ ]* +OF/' \ |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2323 --regex='/[ \t]*\(ATTRIBUTE\|ENTITY\|FUNCTION\|PACKAGE\ |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2324 \( BODY\)?\|PROCEDURE\|PROCESS\|TYPE\)[ \t]+\([^ \t(]+\)/\3/' |
25829 | 2325 @end smallexample |
2326 @end itemize | |
2327 | |
2328 @node Select Tags Table | |
2329 @subsection Selecting a Tags Table | |
2330 | |
2331 @vindex tags-file-name | |
2332 @findex visit-tags-table | |
2333 Emacs has at any time one @dfn{selected} tags table, and all the commands | |
2334 for working with tags tables use the selected one. To select a tags table, | |
2335 type @kbd{M-x visit-tags-table}, which reads the tags table file name as an | |
2336 argument. The name @file{TAGS} in the default directory is used as the | |
2337 default file name. | |
2338 | |
2339 All this command does is store the file name in the variable | |
2340 @code{tags-file-name}. Emacs does not actually read in the tags table | |
2341 contents until you try to use them. Setting this variable yourself is just | |
2342 as good as using @code{visit-tags-table}. The variable's initial value is | |
2343 @code{nil}; that value tells all the commands for working with tags tables | |
2344 that they must ask for a tags table file name to use. | |
2345 | |
2346 Using @code{visit-tags-table} when a tags table is already loaded | |
2347 gives you a choice: you can add the new tags table to the current list | |
2348 of tags tables, or start a new list. The tags commands use all the tags | |
2349 tables in the current list. If you start a new list, the new tags table | |
2350 is used @emph{instead} of others. If you add the new table to the | |
2351 current list, it is used @emph{as well as} the others. When the tags | |
2352 commands scan the list of tags tables, they don't always start at the | |
2353 beginning of the list; they start with the first tags table (if any) | |
2354 that describes the current file, proceed from there to the end of the | |
2355 list, and then scan from the beginning of the list until they have | |
2356 covered all the tables in the list. | |
2357 | |
2358 @vindex tags-table-list | |
2359 You can specify a precise list of tags tables by setting the variable | |
2360 @code{tags-table-list} to a list of strings, like this: | |
2361 | |
2362 @c keep this on two lines for formatting in smallbook | |
2363 @example | |
2364 @group | |
2365 (setq tags-table-list | |
2366 '("~/emacs" "/usr/local/lib/emacs/src")) | |
2367 @end group | |
2368 @end example | |
2369 | |
2370 @noindent | |
2371 This tells the tags commands to look at the @file{TAGS} files in your | |
2372 @file{~/emacs} directory and in the @file{/usr/local/lib/emacs/src} | |
2373 directory. The order depends on which file you are in and which tags | |
2374 table mentions that file, as explained above. | |
2375 | |
2376 Do not set both @code{tags-file-name} and @code{tags-table-list}. | |
2377 | |
2378 @node Find Tag | |
2379 @subsection Finding a Tag | |
2380 | |
2381 The most important thing that a tags table enables you to do is to find | |
2382 the definition of a specific tag. | |
2383 | |
2384 @table @kbd | |
2385 @item M-.@: @var{tag} @key{RET} | |
2386 Find first definition of @var{tag} (@code{find-tag}). | |
2387 @item C-u M-. | |
2388 Find next alternate definition of last tag specified. | |
2389 @item C-u - M-. | |
2390 Go back to previous tag found. | |
2391 @item C-M-. @var{pattern} @key{RET} | |
2392 Find a tag whose name matches @var{pattern} (@code{find-tag-regexp}). | |
2393 @item C-u C-M-. | |
2394 Find the next tag whose name matches the last pattern used. | |
2395 @item C-x 4 .@: @var{tag} @key{RET} | |
2396 Find first definition of @var{tag}, but display it in another window | |
2397 (@code{find-tag-other-window}). | |
2398 @item C-x 5 .@: @var{tag} @key{RET} | |
2399 Find first definition of @var{tag}, and create a new frame to select the | |
2400 buffer (@code{find-tag-other-frame}). | |
2401 @item M-* | |
2402 Pop back to where you previously invoked @kbd{M-.} and friends. | |
2403 @end table | |
2404 | |
2405 @kindex M-. | |
2406 @findex find-tag | |
2407 @kbd{M-.}@: (@code{find-tag}) is the command to find the definition of | |
2408 a specified tag. It searches through the tags table for that tag, as a | |
2409 string, and then uses the tags table info to determine the file that the | |
2410 definition is in and the approximate character position in the file of | |
2411 the definition. Then @code{find-tag} visits that file, moves point to | |
2412 the approximate character position, and searches ever-increasing | |
2413 distances away to find the tag definition. | |
2414 | |
2415 If an empty argument is given (just type @key{RET}), the sexp in the | |
2416 buffer before or around point is used as the @var{tag} argument. | |
2417 @xref{Lists}, for info on sexps. | |
2418 | |
2419 You don't need to give @kbd{M-.} the full name of the tag; a part | |
2420 will do. This is because @kbd{M-.} finds tags in the table which | |
2421 contain @var{tag} as a substring. However, it prefers an exact match | |
2422 to a substring match. To find other tags that match the same | |
2423 substring, give @code{find-tag} a numeric argument, as in @kbd{C-u | |
2424 M-.}; this does not read a tag name, but continues searching the tags | |
2425 table's text for another tag containing the same substring last used. | |
2426 If you have a real @key{META} key, @kbd{M-0 M-.}@: is an easier | |
2427 alternative to @kbd{C-u M-.}. | |
2428 | |
2429 @kindex C-x 4 . | |
2430 @findex find-tag-other-window | |
2431 @kindex C-x 5 . | |
2432 @findex find-tag-other-frame | |
2433 Like most commands that can switch buffers, @code{find-tag} has a | |
2434 variant that displays the new buffer in another window, and one that | |
2435 makes a new frame for it. The former is @kbd{C-x 4 .}, which invokes | |
2436 the command @code{find-tag-other-window}. The latter is @kbd{C-x 5 .}, | |
2437 which invokes @code{find-tag-other-frame}. | |
2438 | |
2439 To move back to places you've found tags recently, use @kbd{C-u - | |
2440 M-.}; more generally, @kbd{M-.} with a negative numeric argument. This | |
2441 command can take you to another buffer. @kbd{C-x 4 .} with a negative | |
2442 argument finds the previous tag location in another window. | |
2443 | |
2444 @kindex M-* | |
2445 @findex pop-tag-mark | |
2446 @vindex find-tag-marker-ring-length | |
2447 As well as going back to places you've found tags recently, you can go | |
2448 back to places @emph{from where} you found them. Use @kbd{M-*}, which | |
2449 invokes the command @code{pop-tag-mark}, for this. Typically you would | |
2450 find and study the definition of something with @kbd{M-.} and then | |
2451 return to where you were with @kbd{M-*}. | |
2452 | |
2453 Both @kbd{C-u - M-.} and @kbd{M-*} allow you to retrace your steps to | |
2454 a depth determined by the variable @code{find-tag-marker-ring-length}. | |
2455 | |
2456 @findex find-tag-regexp | |
2457 @kindex C-M-. | |
2458 The command @kbd{C-M-.} (@code{find-tag-regexp}) visits the tags that | |
2459 match a specified regular expression. It is just like @kbd{M-.} except | |
2460 that it does regexp matching instead of substring matching. | |
2461 | |
2462 @node Tags Search | |
2463 @subsection Searching and Replacing with Tags Tables | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2464 @cindex search and replace in multiple files |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2465 @cindex multiple-file search and replace |
25829 | 2466 |
2467 The commands in this section visit and search all the files listed in the | |
2468 selected tags table, one by one. For these commands, the tags table serves | |
2469 only to specify a sequence of files to search. | |
2470 | |
2471 @table @kbd | |
2472 @item M-x tags-search @key{RET} @var{regexp} @key{RET} | |
2473 Search for @var{regexp} through the files in the selected tags | |
2474 table. | |
2475 @item M-x tags-query-replace @key{RET} @var{regexp} @key{RET} @var{replacement} @key{RET} | |
2476 Perform a @code{query-replace-regexp} on each file in the selected tags table. | |
2477 @item M-, | |
2478 Restart one of the commands above, from the current location of point | |
2479 (@code{tags-loop-continue}). | |
2480 @end table | |
2481 | |
2482 @findex tags-search | |
2483 @kbd{M-x tags-search} reads a regexp using the minibuffer, then | |
2484 searches for matches in all the files in the selected tags table, one | |
2485 file at a time. It displays the name of the file being searched so you | |
2486 can follow its progress. As soon as it finds an occurrence, | |
2487 @code{tags-search} returns. | |
2488 | |
2489 @kindex M-, | |
2490 @findex tags-loop-continue | |
2491 Having found one match, you probably want to find all the rest. To find | |
2492 one more match, type @kbd{M-,} (@code{tags-loop-continue}) to resume the | |
2493 @code{tags-search}. This searches the rest of the current buffer, followed | |
2494 by the remaining files of the tags table.@refill | |
2495 | |
2496 @findex tags-query-replace | |
2497 @kbd{M-x tags-query-replace} performs a single | |
2498 @code{query-replace-regexp} through all the files in the tags table. It | |
2499 reads a regexp to search for and a string to replace with, just like | |
2500 ordinary @kbd{M-x query-replace-regexp}. It searches much like @kbd{M-x | |
2501 tags-search}, but repeatedly, processing matches according to your | |
2502 input. @xref{Replace}, for more information on query replace. | |
2503 | |
31065
357e242b7f87
Document tags-case-fold-search, tags-apropos-verbose and tags-tag-face.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31052
diff
changeset
|
2504 @vindex tags-case-fold-search |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2505 @cindex case-sensitivity and tags search |
31065
357e242b7f87
Document tags-case-fold-search, tags-apropos-verbose and tags-tag-face.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31052
diff
changeset
|
2506 You can control the case-sensitivity of tags search commands by |
357e242b7f87
Document tags-case-fold-search, tags-apropos-verbose and tags-tag-face.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31052
diff
changeset
|
2507 customizing the value of the variable @code{tags-case-fold-search}. The |
357e242b7f87
Document tags-case-fold-search, tags-apropos-verbose and tags-tag-face.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31052
diff
changeset
|
2508 default is to use the same setting as the value of |
357e242b7f87
Document tags-case-fold-search, tags-apropos-verbose and tags-tag-face.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31052
diff
changeset
|
2509 @code{case-fold-search} (@pxref{Search Case}). |
357e242b7f87
Document tags-case-fold-search, tags-apropos-verbose and tags-tag-face.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
31052
diff
changeset
|
2510 |
25829 | 2511 It is possible to get through all the files in the tags table with a |
2512 single invocation of @kbd{M-x tags-query-replace}. But often it is | |
2513 useful to exit temporarily, which you can do with any input event that | |
2514 has no special query replace meaning. You can resume the query replace | |
2515 subsequently by typing @kbd{M-,}; this command resumes the last tags | |
2516 search or replace command that you did. | |
2517 | |
2518 The commands in this section carry out much broader searches than the | |
2519 @code{find-tag} family. The @code{find-tag} commands search only for | |
2520 definitions of tags that match your substring or regexp. The commands | |
2521 @code{tags-search} and @code{tags-query-replace} find every occurrence | |
2522 of the regexp, as ordinary search commands and replace commands do in | |
2523 the current buffer. | |
2524 | |
2525 These commands create buffers only temporarily for the files that they | |
2526 have to search (those which are not already visited in Emacs buffers). | |
2527 Buffers in which no match is found are quickly killed; the others | |
2528 continue to exist. | |
2529 | |
2530 It may have struck you that @code{tags-search} is a lot like | |
2531 @code{grep}. You can also run @code{grep} itself as an inferior of | |
2532 Emacs and have Emacs show you the matching lines one by one. This works | |
2533 much like running a compilation; finding the source locations of the | |
2534 @code{grep} matches works like finding the compilation errors. | |
2535 @xref{Compilation}. | |
26264 | 2536 |
25829 | 2537 @node List Tags |
2538 @subsection Tags Table Inquiries | |
2539 | |
2540 @table @kbd | |
2541 @item M-x list-tags @key{RET} @var{file} @key{RET} | |
2542 Display a list of the tags defined in the program file @var{file}. | |
2543 @item M-x tags-apropos @key{RET} @var{regexp} @key{RET} | |
2544 Display a list of all tags matching @var{regexp}. | |
2545 @end table | |
2546 | |
2547 @findex list-tags | |
2548 @kbd{M-x list-tags} reads the name of one of the files described by | |
2549 the selected tags table, and displays a list of all the tags defined in | |
2550 that file. The ``file name'' argument is really just a string to | |
2551 compare against the file names recorded in the tags table; it is read as | |
2552 a string rather than as a file name. Therefore, completion and | |
2553 defaulting are not available, and you must enter the file name the same | |
2554 way it appears in the tags table. Do not include a directory as part of | |
2555 the file name unless the file name recorded in the tags table includes a | |
2556 directory. | |
2557 | |
2558 @findex tags-apropos | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2559 @vindex tags-apropos-verbose |
25829 | 2560 @kbd{M-x tags-apropos} is like @code{apropos} for tags |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2561 (@pxref{Apropos}). It finds all the tags in the selected tags table |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2562 whose entries match @var{regexp}, and displays them. If the variable |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2563 @code{tags-apropos-verbose} is non-@code{nil}, it displays the names |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2564 of the tags files together with the tag names. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2565 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2566 @vindex tags-tag-face |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
2567 @vindex tags-apropos-additional-actions |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2568 You can customize the appearance of the output with the face |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2569 @code{tags-tag-face}. You can display additional output with @kbd{M-x |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2570 tags-apropos} by customizing the variable |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2571 @code{tags-apropos-additional-actions}---see its documentation for |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2572 details. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2573 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2574 You can also use the collection of tag names to complete a symbol |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2575 name in the buffer. @xref{Symbol Completion}. |
25829 | 2576 |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2577 @node Imenu |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2578 @section Imenu |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2579 @cindex indexes of buffer contents |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2580 @cindex buffer content indexes |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2581 @cindex tags |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2582 |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2583 The Imenu facility is another way to find definitions or sections |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2584 in a file. It is similar in spirit to Tags, but operates on a single |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2585 buffer only, and works entirely within Emacs with no need for a separate |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2586 tags table. |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2587 |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2588 @findex imenu |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2589 @findex imenu-add-menu-bar-index |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2590 If you type @kbd{M-x imenu}, it reads the name of a section or |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2591 definition in the current buffer, then goes to that section or |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2592 definition. You can use completion to specify the name, and a |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2593 complete list of possible names is always displayed. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2594 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2595 Alternatively you can bind the command @code{imenu} to a mouse |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2596 click. Then it displays mouse menus for you to select the section or |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2597 definition you want. You can also add the buffer's index to the menu |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2598 bar by calling @code{imenu-add-menu-bar-index}. If you want to have |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2599 this menu bar item available for all buffers in a certain major mode, |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2600 you can do this by adding @code{imenu-add-menu-bar-index} to its mode |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2601 hook. But then you will have to wait for the buffer to be searched |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2602 for sections and definitions, each time you visit a file which uses |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2603 that mode. |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2604 |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2605 @vindex imenu-auto-rescan |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2606 When you change the contents of a buffer, if you add or delete |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2607 definitions or sections, you can update the buffer's index to |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2608 correspond to the new contents by invoking the @samp{*Rescan*} item in |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2609 the menu. Rescanning happens automatically if |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2610 @code{imenu-auto-rescan} is non-@code{nil}. There is no need to |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2611 rescan because of small changes in the text. |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2612 |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2613 @vindex imenu-sort-function |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2614 You can customize the way the menus are sorted via the variable |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2615 @code{imenu-sort-function}. By default names are ordered as they |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2616 occur in the buffer; alphabetic sorting is provided as an alternative. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2617 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2618 Imenu provides the information to guide Which Function mode |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2619 (@pxref{Which Function}). The Speedbar can also use it |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
2620 (@pxref{Speedbar}). |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2621 |
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
2622 @node Emerge, C Modes, Imenu, Programs |
25829 | 2623 @section Merging Files with Emerge |
2624 @cindex Emerge | |
2625 @cindex merging files | |
2626 | |
2627 It's not unusual for programmers to get their signals crossed and modify | |
2628 the same program in two different directions. To recover from this | |
2629 confusion, you need to merge the two versions. Emerge makes this | |
2630 easier. See also @ref{Comparing Files}, for commands to compare | |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
2631 in a more manual fashion, and @ref{,Ediff,, ediff, The Ediff Manual}. |
25829 | 2632 |
2633 @menu | |
2634 * Overview of Emerge:: How to start Emerge. Basic concepts. | |
2635 * Submodes of Emerge:: Fast mode vs. Edit mode. | |
2636 Skip Prefers mode and Auto Advance mode. | |
2637 * State of Difference:: You do the merge by specifying state A or B | |
2638 for each difference. | |
2639 * Merge Commands:: Commands for selecting a difference, | |
2640 changing states of differences, etc. | |
2641 * Exiting Emerge:: What to do when you've finished the merge. | |
2642 * Combining in Emerge:: How to keep both alternatives for a difference. | |
2643 * Fine Points of Emerge:: Misc. | |
2644 @end menu | |
2645 | |
2646 @node Overview of Emerge | |
2647 @subsection Overview of Emerge | |
2648 | |
2649 To start Emerge, run one of these four commands: | |
2650 | |
2651 @table @kbd | |
2652 @item M-x emerge-files | |
2653 @findex emerge-files | |
2654 Merge two specified files. | |
2655 | |
2656 @item M-x emerge-files-with-ancestor | |
2657 @findex emerge-files-with-ancestor | |
2658 Merge two specified files, with reference to a common ancestor. | |
2659 | |
2660 @item M-x emerge-buffers | |
2661 @findex emerge-buffers | |
2662 Merge two buffers. | |
2663 | |
2664 @item M-x emerge-buffers-with-ancestor | |
2665 @findex emerge-buffers-with-ancestor | |
2666 Merge two buffers with reference to a common ancestor in a third | |
2667 buffer. | |
2668 @end table | |
2669 | |
2670 @cindex merge buffer (Emerge) | |
2671 @cindex A and B buffers (Emerge) | |
2672 The Emerge commands compare two files or buffers, and display the | |
2673 comparison in three buffers: one for each input text (the @dfn{A buffer} | |
2674 and the @dfn{B buffer}), and one (the @dfn{merge buffer}) where merging | |
2675 takes place. The merge buffer shows the full merged text, not just the | |
2676 differences. Wherever the two input texts differ, you can choose which | |
2677 one of them to include in the merge buffer. | |
2678 | |
2679 The Emerge commands that take input from existing buffers use only the | |
2680 accessible portions of those buffers, if they are narrowed | |
2681 (@pxref{Narrowing}). | |
2682 | |
2683 If a common ancestor version is available, from which the two texts to | |
2684 be merged were both derived, Emerge can use it to guess which | |
2685 alternative is right. Wherever one current version agrees with the | |
2686 ancestor, Emerge presumes that the other current version is a deliberate | |
2687 change which should be kept in the merged version. Use the | |
2688 @samp{with-ancestor} commands if you want to specify a common ancestor | |
2689 text. These commands read three file or buffer names---variant A, | |
2690 variant B, and the common ancestor. | |
2691 | |
2692 After the comparison is done and the buffers are prepared, the | |
2693 interactive merging starts. You control the merging by typing special | |
2694 @dfn{merge commands} in the merge buffer. The merge buffer shows you a | |
2695 full merged text, not just differences. For each run of differences | |
2696 between the input texts, you can choose which one of them to keep, or | |
2697 edit them both together. | |
2698 | |
2699 The merge buffer uses a special major mode, Emerge mode, with commands | |
2700 for making these choices. But you can also edit the buffer with | |
2701 ordinary Emacs commands. | |
2702 | |
2703 At any given time, the attention of Emerge is focused on one | |
2704 particular difference, called the @dfn{selected} difference. This | |
2705 difference is marked off in the three buffers like this: | |
2706 | |
2707 @example | |
2708 vvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvv | |
2709 @var{text that differs} | |
2710 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | |
2711 @end example | |
2712 | |
2713 @noindent | |
2714 Emerge numbers all the differences sequentially and the mode | |
2715 line always shows the number of the selected difference. | |
2716 | |
2717 Normally, the merge buffer starts out with the A version of the text. | |
2718 But when the A version of a difference agrees with the common ancestor, | |
2719 then the B version is initially preferred for that difference. | |
2720 | |
2721 Emerge leaves the merged text in the merge buffer when you exit. At | |
2722 that point, you can save it in a file with @kbd{C-x C-w}. If you give a | |
2723 numeric argument to @code{emerge-files} or | |
2724 @code{emerge-files-with-ancestor}, it reads the name of the output file | |
2725 using the minibuffer. (This is the last file name those commands read.) | |
2726 Then exiting from Emerge saves the merged text in the output file. | |
2727 | |
2728 Normally, Emerge commands save the output buffer in its file when you | |
2729 exit. If you abort Emerge with @kbd{C-]}, the Emerge command does not | |
2730 save the output buffer, but you can save it yourself if you wish. | |
2731 | |
2732 @node Submodes of Emerge | |
2733 @subsection Submodes of Emerge | |
2734 | |
2735 You can choose between two modes for giving merge commands: Fast mode | |
2736 and Edit mode. In Fast mode, basic merge commands are single | |
2737 characters, but ordinary Emacs commands are disabled. This is | |
2738 convenient if you use only merge commands. In Edit mode, all merge | |
2739 commands start with the prefix key @kbd{C-c C-c}, and the normal Emacs | |
2740 commands are also available. This allows editing the merge buffer, but | |
2741 slows down Emerge operations. | |
2742 | |
2743 Use @kbd{e} to switch to Edit mode, and @kbd{C-c C-c f} to switch to | |
2744 Fast mode. The mode line indicates Edit and Fast modes with @samp{E} | |
2745 and @samp{F}. | |
2746 | |
2747 Emerge has two additional submodes that affect how particular merge | |
2748 commands work: Auto Advance mode and Skip Prefers mode. | |
2749 | |
2750 If Auto Advance mode is in effect, the @kbd{a} and @kbd{b} commands | |
2751 advance to the next difference. This lets you go through the merge | |
2752 faster as long as you simply choose one of the alternatives from the | |
2753 input. The mode line indicates Auto Advance mode with @samp{A}. | |
2754 | |
2755 If Skip Prefers mode is in effect, the @kbd{n} and @kbd{p} commands | |
2756 skip over differences in states prefer-A and prefer-B (@pxref{State of | |
2757 Difference}). Thus you see only differences for which neither version | |
2758 is presumed ``correct.'' The mode line indicates Skip Prefers mode with | |
2759 @samp{S}. | |
2760 | |
2761 @findex emerge-auto-advance-mode | |
2762 @findex emerge-skip-prefers-mode | |
2763 Use the command @kbd{s a} (@code{emerge-auto-advance-mode}) to set or | |
2764 clear Auto Advance mode. Use @kbd{s s} | |
2765 (@code{emerge-skip-prefers-mode}) to set or clear Skip Prefers mode. | |
2766 These commands turn on the mode with a positive argument, turns it off | |
2767 with a negative or zero argument, and toggle the mode with no argument. | |
2768 | |
2769 @node State of Difference | |
2770 @subsection State of a Difference | |
2771 | |
2772 In the merge buffer, a difference is marked with lines of @samp{v} and | |
2773 @samp{^} characters. Each difference has one of these seven states: | |
2774 | |
2775 @table @asis | |
2776 @item A | |
2777 The difference is showing the A version. The @kbd{a} command always | |
2778 produces this state; the mode line indicates it with @samp{A}. | |
2779 | |
2780 @item B | |
2781 The difference is showing the B version. The @kbd{b} command always | |
2782 produces this state; the mode line indicates it with @samp{B}. | |
2783 | |
2784 @item default-A | |
2785 @itemx default-B | |
2786 The difference is showing the A or the B state by default, because you | |
2787 haven't made a choice. All differences start in the default-A state | |
2788 (and thus the merge buffer is a copy of the A buffer), except those for | |
2789 which one alternative is ``preferred'' (see below). | |
2790 | |
2791 When you select a difference, its state changes from default-A or | |
2792 default-B to plain A or B. Thus, the selected difference never has | |
2793 state default-A or default-B, and these states are never displayed in | |
2794 the mode line. | |
2795 | |
2796 The command @kbd{d a} chooses default-A as the default state, and @kbd{d | |
2797 b} chooses default-B. This chosen default applies to all differences | |
2798 which you haven't ever selected and for which no alternative is preferred. | |
2799 If you are moving through the merge sequentially, the differences you | |
2800 haven't selected are those following the selected one. Thus, while | |
2801 moving sequentially, you can effectively make the A version the default | |
2802 for some sections of the merge buffer and the B version the default for | |
2803 others by using @kbd{d a} and @kbd{d b} between sections. | |
2804 | |
2805 @item prefer-A | |
2806 @itemx prefer-B | |
2807 The difference is showing the A or B state because it is | |
2808 @dfn{preferred}. This means that you haven't made an explicit choice, | |
2809 but one alternative seems likely to be right because the other | |
2810 alternative agrees with the common ancestor. Thus, where the A buffer | |
2811 agrees with the common ancestor, the B version is preferred, because | |
2812 chances are it is the one that was actually changed. | |
2813 | |
2814 These two states are displayed in the mode line as @samp{A*} and @samp{B*}. | |
2815 | |
2816 @item combined | |
2817 The difference is showing a combination of the A and B states, as a | |
2818 result of the @kbd{x c} or @kbd{x C} commands. | |
2819 | |
2820 Once a difference is in this state, the @kbd{a} and @kbd{b} commands | |
2821 don't do anything to it unless you give them a numeric argument. | |
2822 | |
2823 The mode line displays this state as @samp{comb}. | |
2824 @end table | |
2825 | |
2826 @node Merge Commands | |
2827 @subsection Merge Commands | |
2828 | |
2829 Here are the Merge commands for Fast mode; in Edit mode, precede them | |
2830 with @kbd{C-c C-c}: | |
2831 | |
2832 @table @kbd | |
2833 @item p | |
2834 Select the previous difference. | |
2835 | |
2836 @item n | |
2837 Select the next difference. | |
2838 | |
2839 @item a | |
2840 Choose the A version of this difference. | |
2841 | |
2842 @item b | |
2843 Choose the B version of this difference. | |
2844 | |
2845 @item C-u @var{n} j | |
2846 Select difference number @var{n}. | |
2847 | |
2848 @item . | |
2849 Select the difference containing point. You can use this command in the | |
2850 merge buffer or in the A or B buffer. | |
2851 | |
2852 @item q | |
2853 Quit---finish the merge. | |
2854 | |
2855 @item C-] | |
2856 Abort---exit merging and do not save the output. | |
2857 | |
2858 @item f | |
2859 Go into Fast mode. (In Edit mode, this is actually @kbd{C-c C-c f}.) | |
2860 | |
2861 @item e | |
2862 Go into Edit mode. | |
2863 | |
2864 @item l | |
2865 Recenter (like @kbd{C-l}) all three windows. | |
2866 | |
26264 | 2867 @item - |
25829 | 2868 Specify part of a prefix numeric argument. |
2869 | |
2870 @item @var{digit} | |
2871 Also specify part of a prefix numeric argument. | |
2872 | |
2873 @item d a | |
2874 Choose the A version as the default from here down in | |
2875 the merge buffer. | |
2876 | |
2877 @item d b | |
2878 Choose the B version as the default from here down in | |
2879 the merge buffer. | |
2880 | |
2881 @item c a | |
2882 Copy the A version of this difference into the kill ring. | |
2883 | |
2884 @item c b | |
2885 Copy the B version of this difference into the kill ring. | |
2886 | |
2887 @item i a | |
2888 Insert the A version of this difference at point. | |
2889 | |
2890 @item i b | |
2891 Insert the B version of this difference at point. | |
2892 | |
2893 @item m | |
2894 Put point and mark around the difference. | |
2895 | |
2896 @item ^ | |
2897 Scroll all three windows down (like @kbd{M-v}). | |
2898 | |
2899 @item v | |
2900 Scroll all three windows up (like @kbd{C-v}). | |
2901 | |
2902 @item < | |
2903 Scroll all three windows left (like @kbd{C-x <}). | |
2904 | |
2905 @item > | |
2906 Scroll all three windows right (like @kbd{C-x >}). | |
2907 | |
2908 @item | | |
2909 Reset horizontal scroll on all three windows. | |
2910 | |
2911 @item x 1 | |
2912 Shrink the merge window to one line. (Use @kbd{C-u l} to restore it | |
2913 to full size.) | |
2914 | |
2915 @item x c | |
2916 Combine the two versions of this difference (@pxref{Combining in | |
2917 Emerge}). | |
2918 | |
2919 @item x f | |
2920 Show the names of the files/buffers Emerge is operating on, in a Help | |
2921 window. (Use @kbd{C-u l} to restore windows.) | |
2922 | |
2923 @item x j | |
2924 Join this difference with the following one. | |
2925 (@kbd{C-u x j} joins this difference with the previous one.) | |
2926 | |
2927 @item x s | |
2928 Split this difference into two differences. Before you use this | |
2929 command, position point in each of the three buffers at the place where | |
2930 you want to split the difference. | |
2931 | |
2932 @item x t | |
2933 Trim identical lines off the top and bottom of the difference. | |
2934 Such lines occur when the A and B versions are | |
2935 identical but differ from the ancestor version. | |
2936 @end table | |
2937 | |
2938 @node Exiting Emerge | |
2939 @subsection Exiting Emerge | |
2940 | |
2941 The @kbd{q} command (@code{emerge-quit}) finishes the merge, storing | |
2942 the results into the output file if you specified one. It restores the | |
2943 A and B buffers to their proper contents, or kills them if they were | |
2944 created by Emerge and you haven't changed them. It also disables the | |
2945 Emerge commands in the merge buffer, since executing them later could | |
2946 damage the contents of the various buffers. | |
2947 | |
2948 @kbd{C-]} aborts the merge. This means exiting without writing the | |
2949 output file. If you didn't specify an output file, then there is no | |
2950 real difference between aborting and finishing the merge. | |
2951 | |
2952 If the Emerge command was called from another Lisp program, then its | |
2953 return value is @code{t} for successful completion, or @code{nil} if you | |
2954 abort. | |
2955 | |
2956 @node Combining in Emerge | |
2957 @subsection Combining the Two Versions | |
2958 | |
2959 Sometimes you want to keep @emph{both} alternatives for a particular | |
2960 difference. To do this, use @kbd{x c}, which edits the merge buffer | |
2961 like this: | |
2962 | |
2963 @example | |
2964 @group | |
2965 #ifdef NEW | |
2966 @var{version from A buffer} | |
2967 #else /* not NEW */ | |
2968 @var{version from B buffer} | |
2969 #endif /* not NEW */ | |
2970 @end group | |
2971 @end example | |
2972 | |
2973 @noindent | |
2974 @vindex emerge-combine-versions-template | |
2975 While this example shows C preprocessor conditionals delimiting the two | |
2976 alternative versions, you can specify the strings to use by setting | |
2977 the variable @code{emerge-combine-versions-template} to a string of your | |
2978 choice. In the string, @samp{%a} says where to put version A, and | |
2979 @samp{%b} says where to put version B. The default setting, which | |
2980 produces the results shown above, looks like this: | |
2981 | |
2982 @example | |
2983 @group | |
2984 "#ifdef NEW\n%a#else /* not NEW */\n%b#endif /* not NEW */\n" | |
2985 @end group | |
2986 @end example | |
2987 | |
2988 @node Fine Points of Emerge | |
2989 @subsection Fine Points of Emerge | |
2990 | |
2991 During the merge, you mustn't try to edit the A and B buffers yourself. | |
2992 Emerge modifies them temporarily, but ultimately puts them back the way | |
2993 they were. | |
2994 | |
2995 You can have any number of merges going at once---just don't use any one | |
2996 buffer as input to more than one merge at once, since the temporary | |
2997 changes made in these buffers would get in each other's way. | |
2998 | |
2999 Starting Emerge can take a long time because it needs to compare the | |
3000 files fully. Emacs can't do anything else until @code{diff} finishes. | |
3001 Perhaps in the future someone will change Emerge to do the comparison in | |
3002 the background when the input files are large---then you could keep on | |
3003 doing other things with Emacs until Emerge is ready to accept | |
3004 commands. | |
3005 | |
3006 @vindex emerge-startup-hook | |
3007 After setting up the merge, Emerge runs the hook | |
3008 @code{emerge-startup-hook} (@pxref{Hooks}). | |
3009 | |
3010 @node C Modes | |
3011 @section C and Related Modes | |
3012 @cindex C mode | |
3013 @cindex Java mode | |
3014 @cindex Pike mode | |
3015 @cindex IDL mode | |
3016 @cindex CORBA IDL mode | |
3017 @cindex Objective C mode | |
3018 @cindex C++ mode | |
3019 @cindex mode, Java | |
3020 @cindex mode, C | |
3021 @cindex mode, Objective C | |
3022 @cindex mode, CORBA IDL | |
3023 @cindex mode, Pike | |
3024 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3025 This section gives a brief description of the special features |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3026 available in C, C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL, and Pike modes. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3027 (These are called ``C mode and related modes.'') @xref{Top, CC Mode, |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3028 ccmode, , CC Mode}, for a more extensive description of these modes |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3029 and their special features. |
28329
6e740f27f255
(Programs): Mention outline features.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
27221
diff
changeset
|
3030 |
25829 | 3031 @menu |
3032 * Motion in C:: | |
3033 * Electric C:: | |
3034 * Hungry Delete:: | |
3035 * Other C Commands:: | |
3036 * Comments in C:: | |
3037 @end menu | |
3038 | |
3039 @node Motion in C | |
3040 @subsection C Mode Motion Commands | |
3041 | |
3042 This section describes commands for moving point, in C mode and | |
3043 related modes. | |
3044 | |
3045 @table @code | |
3046 @item C-c C-u | |
3047 @kindex C-c C-u @r{(C mode)} | |
3048 @findex c-up-conditional | |
3049 Move point back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the | |
3050 mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative | |
3051 argument, move point forward to the end of the containing | |
3052 preprocessor conditional. When going backwards, @code{#elif} is treated | |
3053 like @code{#else} followed by @code{#if}. When going forwards, | |
3054 @code{#elif} is ignored.@refill | |
3055 | |
3056 @item C-c C-p | |
3057 @kindex C-c C-p @r{(C mode)} | |
3058 @findex c-backward-conditional | |
3059 Move point back over a preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark | |
3060 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative | |
3061 argument, move forward. | |
3062 | |
3063 @item C-c C-n | |
3064 @kindex C-c C-n @r{(C mode)} | |
3065 @findex c-forward-conditional | |
3066 Move point forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark | |
3067 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative | |
3068 argument, move backward. | |
3069 | |
3070 @item M-a | |
3071 @kindex ESC a | |
3072 @findex c-beginning-of-statement | |
3073 Move point to the beginning of the innermost C statement | |
3074 (@code{c-beginning-of-statement}). If point is already at the beginning | |
3075 of a statement, move to the beginning of the preceding statement. With | |
3076 prefix argument @var{n}, move back @var{n} @minus{} 1 statements. | |
3077 | |
3078 If point is within a string or comment, or next to a comment (only | |
3079 whitespace between them), this command moves by sentences instead of | |
3080 statements. | |
3081 | |
3082 When called from a program, this function takes three optional | |
3083 arguments: the numeric prefix argument, a buffer position limit | |
3084 (don't move back before that place), and a flag that controls whether | |
3085 to do sentence motion when inside of a comment. | |
3086 | |
3087 @item M-e | |
3088 @kindex ESC e | |
3089 @findex c-end-of-statement | |
3090 Move point to the end of the innermost C statement; like @kbd{M-a} | |
3091 except that it moves in the other direction (@code{c-end-of-statement}). | |
3092 | |
3093 @item M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature | |
3094 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature | |
3095 Move point backward to beginning of a C++ nomenclature section or word. | |
3096 With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times. If @var{n} is | |
3097 negative, move forward. C++ nomenclature means a symbol name in the | |
3098 style of NamingSymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines; each capital letter | |
3099 begins a section or word. | |
3100 | |
3101 In the GNU project, we recommend using underscores to separate words | |
3102 within an identifier in C or C++, rather than using case distinctions. | |
3103 | |
3104 @item M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature | |
3105 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature | |
3106 Move point forward to end of a C++ nomenclature section or word. | |
3107 With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times. | |
3108 @end table | |
3109 | |
3110 @node Electric C | |
3111 @subsection Electric C Characters | |
3112 | |
3113 In C mode and related modes, certain printing characters are | |
3114 ``electric''---in addition to inserting themselves, they also reindent | |
3115 the current line and may insert newlines. This feature is controlled by | |
3116 the variable @code{c-auto-newline}. The ``electric'' characters are | |
3117 @kbd{@{}, @kbd{@}}, @kbd{:}, @kbd{#}, @kbd{;}, @kbd{,}, @kbd{<}, | |
3118 @kbd{>}, @kbd{/}, @kbd{*}, @kbd{(}, and @kbd{)}. | |
3119 | |
3120 Electric characters insert newlines only when the @dfn{auto-newline} | |
3121 feature is enabled (indicated by @samp{/a} in the mode line after the | |
3122 mode name). This feature is controlled by the variable | |
3123 @code{c-auto-newline}. You can turn this feature on or off with the | |
3124 command @kbd{C-c C-a}: | |
3125 | |
3126 @table @kbd | |
3127 @item C-c C-a | |
3128 @kindex C-c C-a @r{(C mode)} | |
3129 @findex c-toggle-auto-state | |
3130 Toggle the auto-newline feature (@code{c-toggle-auto-state}). With a | |
3131 prefix argument, this command turns the auto-newline feature on if the | |
3132 argument is positive, and off if it is negative. | |
3133 @end table | |
3134 | |
3135 The colon character is electric because that is appropriate for a | |
3136 single colon. But when you want to insert a double colon in C++, the | |
3137 electric behavior of colon is inconvenient. You can insert a double | |
3138 colon with no reindentation or newlines by typing @kbd{C-c :}: | |
3139 | |
3140 @table @kbd | |
3141 @item C-c : | |
3142 @kindex C-c : @r{(C mode)} | |
3143 @findex c-scope-operator | |
3144 Insert a double colon scope operator at point, without reindenting the | |
3145 line or adding any newlines (@code{c-scope-operator}). | |
3146 @end table | |
3147 | |
3148 The electric @kbd{#} key reindents the line if it appears to be the | |
3149 beginning of a preprocessor directive. This happens when the value of | |
3150 @code{c-electric-pound-behavior} is @code{(alignleft)}. You can turn | |
3151 this feature off by setting @code{c-electric-pound-behavior} to | |
3152 @code{nil}. | |
3153 | |
3154 The variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} controls the insertion of | |
3155 newlines before and after inserted braces. It is an association list | |
3156 with elements of the following form: @code{(@var{syntactic-symbol} | |
3157 . @var{nl-list})}. Most of the syntactic symbols that appear in | |
3158 @code{c-offsets-alist} are meaningful here as well. | |
3159 | |
3160 The list @var{nl-list} may contain either of the symbols | |
3161 @code{before} or @code{after}, or both; or it may be @code{nil}. When a | |
3162 brace is inserted, the syntactic context it defines is looked up in | |
3163 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; if it is found, the @var{nl-list} is used | |
3164 to determine where newlines are inserted: either before the brace, | |
3165 after, or both. If not found, the default is to insert a newline both | |
3166 before and after braces. | |
3167 | |
3168 The variable @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} controls the insertion of | |
3169 newlines before and after inserted colons. It is an association list | |
3170 with elements of the following form: @code{(@var{syntactic-symbol} | |
3171 . @var{nl-list})}. The list @var{nl-list} may contain either of the | |
3172 symbols @code{before} or @code{after}, or both; or it may be @code{nil}. | |
3173 | |
3174 When a colon is inserted, the syntactic symbol it defines is looked | |
3175 up in this list, and if found, the @var{nl-list} is used to determine | |
3176 where newlines are inserted: either before the brace, after, or both. | |
3177 If the syntactic symbol is not found in this list, no newlines are | |
3178 inserted. | |
3179 | |
3180 Electric characters can also delete newlines automatically when the | |
3181 auto-newline feature is enabled. This feature makes auto-newline more | |
3182 acceptable, by deleting the newlines in the most common cases where you | |
3183 do not want them. Emacs can recognize several cases in which deleting a | |
3184 newline might be desirable; by setting the variable | |
3185 @code{c-cleanup-list}, you can specify @emph{which} of these cases that | |
3186 should happen. The variable's value is a list of symbols, each | |
3187 describing one case for possible deletion of a newline. Here are the | |
3188 meaningful symbols, and their meanings: | |
3189 | |
3190 @table @code | |
3191 @item brace-catch-brace | |
3192 Clean up @samp{@} catch (@var{condition}) @{} constructs by placing the | |
3193 entire construct on a single line. The clean-up occurs when you type | |
3194 the @samp{@{}, if there is nothing between the braces aside from | |
3195 @code{catch} and @var{condition}. | |
3196 | |
3197 @item brace-else-brace | |
3198 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on | |
3199 a single line. The clean-up occurs when you type the @samp{@{} after | |
3200 the @code{else}, but only if there is nothing but white space between | |
3201 the braces and the @code{else}. | |
3202 | |
3203 @item brace-elseif-brace | |
3204 Clean up @samp{@} else if (@dots{}) @{} constructs by placing the entire | |
3205 construct on a single line. The clean-up occurs when you type the | |
3206 @samp{@{}, if there is nothing but white space between the @samp{@}} and | |
3207 @samp{@{} aside from the keywords and the @code{if}-condition. | |
3208 | |
3209 @item empty-defun-braces | |
3210 Clean up empty defun braces by placing the braces on the same | |
3211 line. Clean-up occurs when you type the closing brace. | |
3212 | |
3213 @item defun-close-semi | |
3214 Clean up the semicolon after a @code{struct} or similar type | |
3215 declaration, by placing the semicolon on the same line as the closing | |
3216 brace. Clean-up occurs when you type the semicolon. | |
3217 | |
3218 @item list-close-comma | |
3219 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate | |
3220 initializers. Clean-up occurs when you type the comma. | |
3221 | |
3222 @item scope-operator | |
3223 Clean up double colons which may designate a C++ scope operator, by | |
3224 placing the colons together. Clean-up occurs when you type the second | |
3225 colon, but only when the two colons are separated by nothing but | |
3226 whitespace. | |
3227 @end table | |
3228 | |
3229 @node Hungry Delete | |
3230 @subsection Hungry Delete Feature in C | |
3231 | |
3232 When the @dfn{hungry-delete} feature is enabled (indicated by | |
3233 @samp{/h} or @samp{/ah} in the mode line after the mode name), a single | |
3234 @key{DEL} command deletes all preceding whitespace, not just one space. | |
3235 To turn this feature on or off, use @kbd{C-c C-d}: | |
3236 | |
3237 @table @kbd | |
3238 @item C-c C-d | |
3239 @kindex C-c C-d @r{(C mode)} | |
3240 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state | |
3241 Toggle the hungry-delete feature (@code{c-toggle-hungry-state}). With a | |
3242 prefix argument, this command turns the hungry-delete feature on if the | |
3243 argument is positive, and off if it is negative. | |
3244 | |
3245 @item C-c C-t | |
3246 @kindex C-c C-t @r{(C mode)} | |
3247 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state | |
3248 Toggle the auto-newline and hungry-delete features, both at once | |
3249 (@code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}). | |
3250 @end table | |
3251 | |
3252 @vindex c-hungry-delete-key | |
3253 The variable @code{c-hungry-delete-key} controls whether the | |
3254 hungry-delete feature is enabled. | |
3255 | |
3256 @node Other C Commands | |
3257 @subsection Other Commands for C Mode | |
3258 | |
3259 @table @kbd | |
3260 @item C-M-h | |
3261 Put mark at the end of a function definition, and put point at the | |
3262 beginning (@code{c-mark-function}). | |
3263 | |
3264 @item M-q | |
3265 @kindex M-q @r{(C mode)} | |
3266 @findex c-fill-paragraph | |
3267 Fill a paragraph, handling C and C++ comments (@code{c-fill-paragraph}). | |
3268 If any part of the current line is a comment or within a comment, this | |
3269 command fills the comment or the paragraph of it that point is in, | |
3270 preserving the comment indentation and comment delimiters. | |
3271 | |
3272 @item C-c C-e | |
3273 @cindex macro expansion in C | |
3274 @cindex expansion of C macros | |
3275 @findex c-macro-expand | |
3276 @kindex C-c C-e @r{(C mode)} | |
3277 Run the C preprocessor on the text in the region, and show the result, | |
3278 which includes the expansion of all the macro calls | |
3279 (@code{c-macro-expand}). The buffer text before the region is also | |
3280 included in preprocessing, for the sake of macros defined there, but the | |
3281 output from this part isn't shown. | |
3282 | |
3283 When you are debugging C code that uses macros, sometimes it is hard to | |
3284 figure out precisely how the macros expand. With this command, you | |
3285 don't have to figure it out; you can see the expansions. | |
3286 | |
3287 @item C-c C-\ | |
3288 @findex c-backslash-region | |
3289 @kindex C-c C-\ @r{(C mode)} | |
3290 Insert or align @samp{\} characters at the ends of the lines of the | |
3291 region (@code{c-backslash-region}). This is useful after writing or | |
3292 editing a C macro definition. | |
3293 | |
3294 If a line already ends in @samp{\}, this command adjusts the amount of | |
3295 whitespace before it. Otherwise, it inserts a new @samp{\}. However, | |
3296 the last line in the region is treated specially; no @samp{\} is | |
3297 inserted on that line, and any @samp{\} there is deleted. | |
3298 | |
3299 @item M-x cpp-highlight-buffer | |
3300 @cindex preprocessor highlighting | |
3301 @findex cpp-highlight-buffer | |
3302 Highlight parts of the text according to its preprocessor conditionals. | |
3303 This command displays another buffer named @samp{*CPP Edit*}, which | |
3304 serves as a graphic menu for selecting how to display particular kinds | |
3305 of conditionals and their contents. After changing various settings, | |
3306 click on @samp{[A]pply these settings} (or go to that buffer and type | |
3307 @kbd{a}) to rehighlight the C mode buffer accordingly. | |
3308 | |
3309 @item C-c C-s | |
3310 @findex c-show-syntactic-information | |
3311 @kindex C-c C-s @r{(C mode)} | |
3312 Display the syntactic information about the current source line | |
3313 (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}). This is the information that | |
3314 directs how the line is indented. | |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3315 |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3316 @item M-x cwarn-mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3317 @itemx M-x global-cwarn-mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3318 @findex cwarn-mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3319 @findex global-cwarn-mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3320 @cindex CWarn mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3321 @cindex suspicious constructions in C, C++ |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3322 CWarn minor mode highlights certain suspicious C and C++ constructions: |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3323 |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3324 @itemize @bullet{} |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3325 @item |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3326 Assignments inside expressions. |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3327 @item |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3328 Semicolon following immediately after @samp{if}, @samp{for}, and @samp{while} |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3329 (except after a @samp{do @dots{} while} statement); |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3330 @item |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3331 C++ functions with reference parameters. |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3332 @end itemize |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3333 |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3334 @noindent |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3335 You can enable the mode for one buffer with the command @kbd{M-x |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3336 cwarn-mode}, or for all suitable buffers with the command @kbd{M-x |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3337 global-cwarn-mode} or by customizing the variable |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3338 @code{global-cwarn-mode}. You must also enable Font Lock mode to make |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3339 it work. |
30810
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3340 |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3341 @item M-x hide-ifdef-mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3342 @findex hide-ifdef-mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3343 @cindex Hide-ifdef mode |
6c6b0162bae2
Tidy up previous additions. List more languages. Glasses mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
30793
diff
changeset
|
3344 Hide-ifdef minor mode hides selected code within @samp{#if} and |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3345 @samp{#ifdef} preprocessor blocks. See the documentation string of |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3346 @code{hide-ifdef-mode} for more information. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3347 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3348 @item M-x ff-find-related-file |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3349 @cindex related files |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3350 @findex ff-find-related-file |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3351 @vindex ff-related-file-alist |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3352 Find a file ``related'' in a special way to the file visited by the |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3353 current buffer. Typically this will be the header file corresponding |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3354 to a C/C++ source file, or vice versa. The variable |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3355 @code{ff-related-file-alist} specifies how to compute related file |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3356 names. |
25829 | 3357 @end table |
3358 | |
3359 @node Comments in C | |
3360 @subsection Comments in C Modes | |
3361 | |
3362 C mode and related modes use a number of variables for controlling | |
3363 comment format. | |
3364 | |
3365 @table @code | |
3366 @item c-comment-only-line-offset | |
3367 @vindex c-comment-only-line-offset | |
3368 Extra offset for line which contains only the start of a comment. It | |
3369 can be either an integer or a cons cell of the form | |
3370 @code{(@var{non-anchored-offset} . @var{anchored-offset})}, where | |
3371 @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to | |
3372 non-column-zero anchored comment-only lines, and @var{anchored-offset} | |
3373 is the amount of offset to give column-zero anchored comment-only lines. | |
3374 Just an integer as value is equivalent to @code{(@var{val} . 0)}. | |
3375 | |
3376 @item c-comment-start-regexp | |
3377 @vindex c-comment-start-regexp | |
3378 This buffer-local variable specifies how to recognize the start of a comment. | |
3379 | |
3380 @item c-hanging-comment-ender-p | |
3381 @vindex c-hanging-comment-ender-p | |
3382 If this variable is @code{nil}, @code{c-fill-paragraph} leaves the | |
3383 comment terminator of a block comment on a line by itself. The default | |
3384 value is @code{t}, which puts the comment-end delimiter @samp{*/} at the | |
3385 end of the last line of the comment text. | |
3386 | |
3387 @item c-hanging-comment-starter-p | |
3388 @vindex c-hanging-comment-starter-p | |
3389 If this variable is @code{nil}, @code{c-fill-paragraph} leaves the | |
3390 starting delimiter of a block comment on a line by itself. The default | |
3391 value is @code{t}, which puts the comment-start delimiter @samp{/*} at | |
3392 the beginning of the first line of the comment text. | |
3393 @end table | |
3394 | |
3395 @node Fortran | |
3396 @section Fortran Mode | |
3397 @cindex Fortran mode | |
3398 @cindex mode, Fortran | |
3399 | |
3400 Fortran mode provides special motion commands for Fortran statements and | |
3401 subprograms, and indentation commands that understand Fortran conventions | |
3402 of nesting, line numbers and continuation statements. Fortran mode has | |
3403 its own Auto Fill mode that breaks long lines into proper Fortran | |
3404 continuation lines. | |
3405 | |
3406 Special commands for comments are provided because Fortran comments | |
3407 are unlike those of other languages. Built-in abbrevs optionally save | |
3408 typing when you insert Fortran keywords. | |
3409 | |
3410 Use @kbd{M-x fortran-mode} to switch to this major mode. This command | |
3411 runs the hook @code{fortran-mode-hook} (@pxref{Hooks}). | |
3412 | |
36263
11db0318031d
Remove redundant index entries.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
36198
diff
changeset
|
3413 @cindex Fortran77 and Fortran90 |
26106 | 3414 @findex f90-mode |
3415 @findex fortran-mode | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3416 Fortan mode is meant for editing Fortran77 ``fixed format'' source |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3417 code. For editing the modern Fortran90 ``free format'' source code, |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3418 use F90 mode (@code{f90-mode}). Emacs normally uses Fortran mode for |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3419 files with extension @samp{.f}, @samp{.F} or @samp{.for}, and F90 mode |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3420 for the extension @samp{.f90}. GNU Fortran supports both kinds of |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3421 format. |
26106 | 3422 |
25829 | 3423 @menu |
3424 * Motion: Fortran Motion. Moving point by statements or subprograms. | |
3425 * Indent: Fortran Indent. Indentation commands for Fortran. | |
3426 * Comments: Fortran Comments. Inserting and aligning comments. | |
3427 * Autofill: Fortran Autofill. Auto fill minor mode for Fortran. | |
3428 * Columns: Fortran Columns. Measuring columns for valid Fortran. | |
3429 * Abbrev: Fortran Abbrev. Built-in abbrevs for Fortran keywords. | |
3430 @end menu | |
3431 | |
3432 @node Fortran Motion | |
3433 @subsection Motion Commands | |
3434 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3435 In addition to the normal commands for moving by and operating on |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3436 ``defuns'' (Fortran subprograms---functions and subroutines), Fortran |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3437 mode provides special commands to move by statements. |
25829 | 3438 |
3439 @table @kbd | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3440 @kindex C-c C-n @r{(Fortran mode)} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3441 @findex fortran-next-statement |
25829 | 3442 @item C-c C-n |
3443 Move to beginning of current or next statement | |
3444 (@code{fortran-next-statement}). | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3445 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3446 @kindex C-c C-p @r{(Fortran mode)} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3447 @findex fortran-previous-statement |
25829 | 3448 @item C-c C-p |
3449 Move to beginning of current or previous statement | |
3450 (@code{fortran-previous-statement}). | |
3451 @end table | |
3452 | |
3453 @node Fortran Indent | |
3454 @subsection Fortran Indentation | |
3455 | |
3456 Special commands and features are needed for indenting Fortran code in | |
3457 order to make sure various syntactic entities (line numbers, comment line | |
3458 indicators and continuation line flags) appear in the columns that are | |
3459 required for standard Fortran. | |
3460 | |
3461 @menu | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3462 * Commands: ForIndent Commands. Commands for indenting and filling Fortran. |
25829 | 3463 * Contline: ForIndent Cont. How continuation lines indent. |
3464 * Numbers: ForIndent Num. How line numbers auto-indent. | |
3465 * Conv: ForIndent Conv. Conventions you must obey to avoid trouble. | |
3466 * Vars: ForIndent Vars. Variables controlling Fortran indent style. | |
3467 @end menu | |
3468 | |
3469 @node ForIndent Commands | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3470 @subsubsection Fortran Indentation and Filling Commands |
25829 | 3471 |
3472 @table @kbd | |
3473 @item C-M-j | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3474 Break the current line and set up a continuation line |
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3475 (@code{fortran-split-line}). |
25829 | 3476 @item M-^ |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3477 Join this line to the previous line (@code{fortran-join-line}). |
25829 | 3478 @item C-M-q |
3479 Indent all the lines of the subprogram point is in | |
3480 (@code{fortran-indent-subprogram}). | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3481 @item M-q |
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3482 Fill a comment block or statement. |
25829 | 3483 @end table |
3484 | |
3485 @kindex C-M-q @r{(Fortran mode)} | |
3486 @findex fortran-indent-subprogram | |
3487 The key @kbd{C-M-q} runs @code{fortran-indent-subprogram}, a command | |
3488 to reindent all the lines of the Fortran subprogram (function or | |
3489 subroutine) containing point. | |
3490 | |
3491 @kindex C-M-j @r{(Fortran mode)} | |
3492 @findex fortran-split-line | |
3493 The key @kbd{C-M-j} runs @code{fortran-split-line}, which splits | |
3494 a line in the appropriate fashion for Fortran. In a non-comment line, | |
3495 the second half becomes a continuation line and is indented | |
3496 accordingly. In a comment line, both halves become separate comment | |
3497 lines. | |
3498 | |
3499 @kindex M-^ @r{(Fortran mode)} | |
26106 | 3500 @kindex C-c C-d @r{(Fortran mode)} |
3501 @findex fortran-join-line | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3502 @kbd{M-^} or @kbd{C-c C-d} runs the command @code{fortran-join-line}, |
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3503 which joins a continuation line back to the previous line, roughly as |
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3504 the inverse of @code{fortran-split-line}. The point must be on a |
26106 | 3505 continuation line when this command is invoked. |
3506 | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3507 @kindex M-q @r{(Fortran mode)} |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3508 @kbd{M-q} in Fortran mode fills the comment block or statement that |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3509 point is in. This removes any excess statement continuations. |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3510 |
25829 | 3511 @node ForIndent Cont |
3512 @subsubsection Continuation Lines | |
3513 @cindex Fortran continuation lines | |
3514 | |
3515 @vindex fortran-continuation-string | |
3516 Most modern Fortran compilers allow two ways of writing continuation | |
3517 lines. If the first non-space character on a line is in column 5, then | |
3518 that line is a continuation of the previous line. We call this | |
3519 @dfn{fixed format}. (In GNU Emacs we always count columns from 0.) The | |
3520 variable @code{fortran-continuation-string} specifies what character to | |
3521 put on column 5. A line that starts with a tab character followed by | |
3522 any digit except @samp{0} is also a continuation line. We call this | |
3523 style of continuation @dfn{tab format}. | |
3524 | |
3525 @vindex indent-tabs-mode @r{(Fortran mode)} | |
3526 Fortran mode can make either style of continuation line, but you | |
3527 must specify which one you prefer. The value of the variable | |
3528 @code{indent-tabs-mode} controls the choice: @code{nil} for fixed | |
3529 format, and non-@code{nil} for tab format. You can tell which style | |
3530 is presently in effect by the presence or absence of the string | |
3531 @samp{Tab} in the mode line. | |
3532 | |
3533 If the text on a line starts with the conventional Fortran | |
3534 continuation marker @samp{$}, or if it begins with any non-whitespace | |
3535 character in column 5, Fortran mode treats it as a continuation line. | |
3536 When you indent a continuation line with @key{TAB}, it converts the line | |
3537 to the current continuation style. When you split a Fortran statement | |
3538 with @kbd{C-M-j}, the continuation marker on the newline is created | |
3539 according to the continuation style. | |
3540 | |
3541 The setting of continuation style affects several other aspects of | |
3542 editing in Fortran mode. In fixed format mode, the minimum column | |
3543 number for the body of a statement is 6. Lines inside of Fortran | |
3544 blocks that are indented to larger column numbers always use only the | |
3545 space character for whitespace. In tab format mode, the minimum | |
3546 column number for the statement body is 8, and the whitespace before | |
3547 column 8 must always consist of one tab character. | |
3548 | |
3549 @vindex fortran-tab-mode-default | |
3550 @vindex fortran-analyze-depth | |
3551 When you enter Fortran mode for an existing file, it tries to deduce the | |
3552 proper continuation style automatically from the file contents. The first | |
3553 line that begins with either a tab character or six spaces determines the | |
3554 choice. The variable @code{fortran-analyze-depth} specifies how many lines | |
3555 to consider (at the beginning of the file); if none of those lines | |
3556 indicates a style, then the variable @code{fortran-tab-mode-default} | |
3557 specifies the style. If it is @code{nil}, that specifies fixed format, and | |
3558 non-@code{nil} specifies tab format. | |
3559 | |
3560 @node ForIndent Num | |
3561 @subsubsection Line Numbers | |
3562 | |
3563 If a number is the first non-whitespace in the line, Fortran | |
3564 indentation assumes it is a line number and moves it to columns 0 | |
3565 through 4. (Columns always count from 0 in GNU Emacs.) | |
3566 | |
3567 @vindex fortran-line-number-indent | |
3568 Line numbers of four digits or less are normally indented one space. | |
3569 The variable @code{fortran-line-number-indent} controls this; it | |
3570 specifies the maximum indentation a line number can have. Line numbers | |
3571 are indented to right-justify them to end in column 4 unless that would | |
3572 require more than this maximum indentation. The default value of the | |
3573 variable is 1. | |
3574 | |
3575 @vindex fortran-electric-line-number | |
3576 Simply inserting a line number is enough to indent it according to | |
3577 these rules. As each digit is inserted, the indentation is recomputed. | |
3578 To turn off this feature, set the variable | |
3579 @code{fortran-electric-line-number} to @code{nil}. Then inserting line | |
3580 numbers is like inserting anything else. | |
3581 | |
3582 @node ForIndent Conv | |
3583 @subsubsection Syntactic Conventions | |
3584 | |
3585 Fortran mode assumes that you follow certain conventions that simplify | |
3586 the task of understanding a Fortran program well enough to indent it | |
3587 properly: | |
3588 | |
3589 @itemize @bullet | |
3590 @item | |
3591 Two nested @samp{do} loops never share a @samp{continue} statement. | |
3592 | |
3593 @item | |
3594 Fortran keywords such as @samp{if}, @samp{else}, @samp{then}, @samp{do} | |
3595 and others are written without embedded whitespace or line breaks. | |
3596 | |
3597 Fortran compilers generally ignore whitespace outside of string | |
3598 constants, but Fortran mode does not recognize these keywords if they | |
3599 are not contiguous. Constructs such as @samp{else if} or @samp{end do} | |
3600 are acceptable, but the second word should be on the same line as the | |
3601 first and not on a continuation line. | |
3602 @end itemize | |
3603 | |
3604 @noindent | |
3605 If you fail to follow these conventions, the indentation commands may | |
3606 indent some lines unaesthetically. However, a correct Fortran program | |
3607 retains its meaning when reindented even if the conventions are not | |
3608 followed. | |
3609 | |
3610 @node ForIndent Vars | |
3611 @subsubsection Variables for Fortran Indentation | |
3612 | |
3613 @vindex fortran-do-indent | |
3614 @vindex fortran-if-indent | |
3615 @vindex fortran-structure-indent | |
3616 @vindex fortran-continuation-indent | |
3617 @vindex fortran-check-all-num@dots{} | |
3618 @vindex fortran-minimum-statement-indent@dots{} | |
3619 Several additional variables control how Fortran indentation works: | |
3620 | |
3621 @table @code | |
3622 @item fortran-do-indent | |
3623 Extra indentation within each level of @samp{do} statement (default 3). | |
3624 | |
3625 @item fortran-if-indent | |
3626 Extra indentation within each level of @samp{if} statement (default 3). | |
3627 This value is also used for extra indentation within each level of the | |
3628 Fortran 90 @samp{where} statement. | |
3629 | |
3630 @item fortran-structure-indent | |
3631 Extra indentation within each level of @samp{structure}, @samp{union}, or | |
3632 @samp{map} statements (default 3). | |
3633 | |
3634 @item fortran-continuation-indent | |
3635 Extra indentation for bodies of continuation lines (default 5). | |
3636 | |
3637 @item fortran-check-all-num-for-matching-do | |
3638 If this is @code{nil}, indentation assumes that each @samp{do} statement | |
3639 ends on a @samp{continue} statement. Therefore, when computing | |
3640 indentation for a statement other than @samp{continue}, it can save time | |
3641 by not checking for a @samp{do} statement ending there. If this is | |
3642 non-@code{nil}, indenting any numbered statement must check for a | |
3643 @samp{do} that ends there. The default is @code{nil}. | |
3644 | |
3645 @item fortran-blink-matching-if | |
3646 If this is @code{t}, indenting an @samp{endif} statement moves the | |
3647 cursor momentarily to the matching @samp{if} statement to show where it | |
3648 is. The default is @code{nil}. | |
3649 | |
3650 @item fortran-minimum-statement-indent-fixed | |
3651 Minimum indentation for fortran statements when using fixed format | |
3652 continuation line style. Statement bodies are never indented less than | |
3653 this much. The default is 6. | |
3654 | |
3655 @item fortran-minimum-statement-indent-tab | |
3656 Minimum indentation for fortran statements for tab format continuation line | |
3657 style. Statement bodies are never indented less than this much. The | |
3658 default is 8. | |
3659 @end table | |
3660 | |
3661 @node Fortran Comments | |
3662 @subsection Fortran Comments | |
3663 | |
3664 The usual Emacs comment commands assume that a comment can follow a line | |
3665 of code. In Fortran, the standard comment syntax requires an entire line | |
3666 to be just a comment. Therefore, Fortran mode replaces the standard Emacs | |
3667 comment commands and defines some new variables. | |
3668 | |
27221
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3669 Fortran mode can also handle the Fortran90 comment syntax where comments |
4a723a7bc25a
Mention outline-minor-mode, check-parens,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26462
diff
changeset
|
3670 start with @samp{!} and can follow other text. Because only some Fortran77 |
25829 | 3671 compilers accept this syntax, Fortran mode will not insert such comments |
3672 unless you have said in advance to do so. To do this, set the variable | |
3673 @code{comment-start} to @samp{"!"} (@pxref{Variables}). | |
3674 | |
3675 @table @kbd | |
3676 @item M-; | |
3677 Align comment or insert new comment (@code{fortran-comment-indent}). | |
3678 | |
3679 @item C-x ; | |
3680 Applies to nonstandard @samp{!} comments only. | |
3681 | |
3682 @item C-c ; | |
3683 Turn all lines of the region into comments, or (with argument) turn them back | |
3684 into real code (@code{fortran-comment-region}). | |
3685 @end table | |
3686 | |
3687 @kbd{M-;} in Fortran mode is redefined as the command | |
3688 @code{fortran-comment-indent}. Like the usual @kbd{M-;} command, this | |
3689 recognizes any kind of existing comment and aligns its text appropriately; | |
3690 if there is no existing comment, a comment is inserted and aligned. But | |
3691 inserting and aligning comments are not the same in Fortran mode as in | |
3692 other modes. | |
3693 | |
3694 When a new comment must be inserted, if the current line is blank, a | |
3695 full-line comment is inserted. On a non-blank line, a nonstandard @samp{!} | |
3696 comment is inserted if you have said you want to use them. Otherwise a | |
3697 full-line comment is inserted on a new line before the current line. | |
3698 | |
3699 Nonstandard @samp{!} comments are aligned like comments in other | |
3700 languages, but full-line comments are different. In a standard full-line | |
3701 comment, the comment delimiter itself must always appear in column zero. | |
3702 What can be aligned is the text within the comment. You can choose from | |
3703 three styles of alignment by setting the variable | |
3704 @code{fortran-comment-indent-style} to one of these values: | |
3705 | |
3706 @vindex fortran-comment-indent-style | |
3707 @vindex fortran-comment-line-extra-indent | |
3708 @table @code | |
3709 @item fixed | |
3710 Align the text at a fixed column, which is the sum of | |
3711 @code{fortran-comment-line-extra-indent} and the minimum statement | |
3712 indentation. This is the default. | |
3713 | |
3714 The minimum statement indentation is | |
3715 @code{fortran-minimum-statement-indent-fixed} for fixed format | |
3716 continuation line style and @code{fortran-minimum-statement-indent-tab} | |
3717 for tab format style. | |
3718 | |
3719 @item relative | |
3720 Align the text as if it were a line of code, but with an additional | |
3721 @code{fortran-comment-line-extra-indent} columns of indentation. | |
3722 | |
3723 @item nil | |
3724 Don't move text in full-line comments automatically at all. | |
3725 @end table | |
3726 | |
3727 @vindex fortran-comment-indent-char | |
3728 In addition, you can specify the character to be used to indent within | |
3729 full-line comments by setting the variable | |
3730 @code{fortran-comment-indent-char} to the single-character string you want | |
3731 to use. | |
3732 | |
3733 @vindex comment-line-start | |
3734 @vindex comment-line-start-skip | |
3735 Fortran mode introduces two variables @code{comment-line-start} and | |
3736 @code{comment-line-start-skip}, which play for full-line comments the same | |
3737 roles played by @code{comment-start} and @code{comment-start-skip} for | |
3738 ordinary text-following comments. Normally these are set properly by | |
3739 Fortran mode, so you do not need to change them. | |
3740 | |
3741 The normal Emacs comment command @kbd{C-x ;} has not been redefined. If | |
3742 you use @samp{!} comments, this command can be used with them. Otherwise | |
3743 it is useless in Fortran mode. | |
3744 | |
3745 @kindex C-c ; @r{(Fortran mode)} | |
3746 @findex fortran-comment-region | |
3747 @vindex fortran-comment-region | |
3748 The command @kbd{C-c ;} (@code{fortran-comment-region}) turns all the | |
3749 lines of the region into comments by inserting the string @samp{C$$$} at | |
3750 the front of each one. With a numeric argument, it turns the region | |
3751 back into live code by deleting @samp{C$$$} from the front of each line | |
3752 in it. The string used for these comments can be controlled by setting | |
3753 the variable @code{fortran-comment-region}. Note that here we have an | |
3754 example of a command and a variable with the same name; these two uses | |
3755 of the name never conflict because in Lisp and in Emacs it is always | |
3756 clear from the context which one is meant. | |
3757 | |
3758 @node Fortran Autofill | |
3759 @subsection Fortran Auto Fill Mode | |
3760 | |
3761 Fortran Auto Fill mode is a minor mode which automatically splits | |
3762 Fortran statements as you insert them when they become too wide. | |
3763 Splitting a statement involves making continuation lines using | |
3764 @code{fortran-continuation-string} (@pxref{ForIndent Cont}). This | |
3765 splitting happens when you type @key{SPC}, @key{RET}, or @key{TAB}, and | |
3766 also in the Fortran indentation commands. | |
3767 | |
3768 @findex fortran-auto-fill-mode | |
3769 @kbd{M-x fortran-auto-fill-mode} turns Fortran Auto Fill mode on if it | |
3770 was off, or off if it was on. This command works the same as @kbd{M-x | |
3771 auto-fill-mode} does for normal Auto Fill mode (@pxref{Filling}). A | |
3772 positive numeric argument turns Fortran Auto Fill mode on, and a | |
3773 negative argument turns it off. You can see when Fortran Auto Fill mode | |
3774 is in effect by the presence of the word @samp{Fill} in the mode line, | |
3775 inside the parentheses. Fortran Auto Fill mode is a minor mode, turned | |
3776 on or off for each buffer individually. @xref{Minor Modes}. | |
3777 | |
3778 @vindex fortran-break-before-delimiters | |
3779 Fortran Auto Fill mode breaks lines at spaces or delimiters when the | |
3780 lines get longer than the desired width (the value of @code{fill-column}). | |
3781 The delimiters that Fortran Auto Fill mode may break at are @samp{,}, | |
3782 @samp{'}, @samp{+}, @samp{-}, @samp{/}, @samp{*}, @samp{=}, and @samp{)}. | |
3783 The line break comes after the delimiter if the variable | |
3784 @code{fortran-break-before-delimiters} is @code{nil}. Otherwise (and by | |
3785 default), the break comes before the delimiter. | |
3786 | |
3787 By default, Fortran Auto Fill mode is not enabled. If you want this | |
3788 feature turned on permanently, add a hook function to | |
3789 @code{fortran-mode-hook} to execute @code{(fortran-auto-fill-mode 1)}. | |
3790 @xref{Hooks}. | |
3791 | |
3792 @node Fortran Columns | |
3793 @subsection Checking Columns in Fortran | |
3794 | |
3795 @table @kbd | |
3796 @item C-c C-r | |
3797 Display a ``column ruler'' momentarily above the current line | |
3798 (@code{fortran-column-ruler}). | |
3799 @item C-c C-w | |
3800 Split the current window horizontally temporarily so that it is 72 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3801 columns wide (@code{fortran-window-create-momentarily}). This may |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3802 help you avoid making lines longer than the 72-character limit that |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3803 some Fortran compilers impose. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3804 @item C-u C-c C-w |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3805 Split the current window horizontally so that it is 72 columns wide |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3806 (@code{fortran-window-create}). You can then continue editing. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3807 @item M-x fortran-strip-sequence-nos |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3808 Delete all text in column 72 and beyond. |
25829 | 3809 @end table |
3810 | |
3811 @kindex C-c C-r @r{(Fortran mode)} | |
3812 @findex fortran-column-ruler | |
3813 The command @kbd{C-c C-r} (@code{fortran-column-ruler}) shows a column | |
3814 ruler momentarily above the current line. The comment ruler is two lines | |
3815 of text that show you the locations of columns with special significance in | |
3816 Fortran programs. Square brackets show the limits of the columns for line | |
3817 numbers, and curly brackets show the limits of the columns for the | |
3818 statement body. Column numbers appear above them. | |
3819 | |
3820 Note that the column numbers count from zero, as always in GNU Emacs. | |
3821 As a result, the numbers may be one less than those you are familiar | |
3822 with; but the positions they indicate in the line are standard for | |
3823 Fortran. | |
3824 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3825 @vindex fortran-column-ruler-fixed |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3826 @vindex fortran-column-ruler-tabs |
26264 | 3827 The text used to display the column ruler depends on the value of |
25829 | 3828 the variable @code{indent-tabs-mode}. If @code{indent-tabs-mode} is |
3829 @code{nil}, then the value of the variable | |
3830 @code{fortran-column-ruler-fixed} is used as the column ruler. | |
3831 Otherwise, the variable @code{fortran-column-ruler-tab} is displayed. | |
3832 By changing these variables, you can change the column ruler display. | |
3833 | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3834 @kindex C-c C-w @r{(Fortran mode)} |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3835 @findex fortran-window-create-momentarily |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3836 @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{fortran-window-create-momentarily}) temporarily |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3837 splits the current window horizontally, making a window 72 columns |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3838 wide, so you can see which lines that is too long. Type a space to |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3839 restore the normal width. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3840 |
26106 | 3841 @kindex C-u C-c C-w @r{(Fortran mode)} |
25829 | 3842 @findex fortran-window-create |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3843 You can also split the window horizontally and continue editing with |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3844 the split in place. To do this, use @kbd{C-u C-c C-w} (@code{M-x |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3845 fortran-window-create}). By editing in this window you can |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3846 immediately see when you make a line too wide to be correct Fortran. |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3847 |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3848 @findex fortran-strip-sequence-nos |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3849 The command @kbd{M-x fortran-strip-sequence-nos} deletes all text in |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3850 column 72 and beyond, on all lines in the current buffer. This is the |
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3851 easiest way to get rid of old sequence numbers. |
26106 | 3852 |
25829 | 3853 @node Fortran Abbrev |
3854 @subsection Fortran Keyword Abbrevs | |
3855 | |
3856 Fortran mode provides many built-in abbrevs for common keywords and | |
3857 declarations. These are the same sort of abbrev that you can define | |
3858 yourself. To use them, you must turn on Abbrev mode. @xref{Abbrevs}. | |
3859 | |
3860 The built-in abbrevs are unusual in one way: they all start with a | |
3861 semicolon. You cannot normally use semicolon in an abbrev, but Fortran | |
3862 mode makes this possible by changing the syntax of semicolon to ``word | |
3863 constituent.'' | |
3864 | |
3865 For example, one built-in Fortran abbrev is @samp{;c} for | |
3866 @samp{continue}. If you insert @samp{;c} and then insert a punctuation | |
3867 character such as a space or a newline, the @samp{;c} expands automatically | |
3868 to @samp{continue}, provided Abbrev mode is enabled.@refill | |
3869 | |
3870 Type @samp{;?} or @samp{;C-h} to display a list of all the built-in | |
3871 Fortran abbrevs and what they stand for. | |
3872 | |
3873 @node Asm Mode | |
3874 @section Asm Mode | |
3875 | |
3876 @cindex Asm mode | |
36183
d3f65290e6b2
Clean up comment-dwim vs indent-for-comment, etc.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
35477
diff
changeset
|
3877 @cindex assembler mode |
25829 | 3878 Asm mode is a major mode for editing files of assembler code. It |
3879 defines these commands: | |
3880 | |
3881 @table @kbd | |
3882 @item @key{TAB} | |
3883 @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. | |
3884 @item C-j | |
3885 Insert a newline and then indent using @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. | |
3886 @item : | |
3887 Insert a colon and then remove the indentation from before the label | |
3888 preceding colon. Then do @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. | |
3889 @item ; | |
3890 Insert or align a comment. | |
3891 @end table | |
3892 | |
3893 The variable @code{asm-comment-char} specifies which character | |
3894 starts comments in assembler syntax. |